5Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF)                  A. Melnikov, Ed.
 
6Request for Comments: 9051                                     Isode Ltd
 
7Obsoletes: 3501                                            B. Leiba, Ed.
 
8Category: Standards Track                         Futurewei Technologies
 
9ISSN: 2070-1721                                              August 2021
 
12        Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) - Version 4rev2
 
16   The Internet Message Access Protocol Version 4rev2 (IMAP4rev2) allows
 
17   a client to access and manipulate electronic mail messages on a
 
18   server.  IMAP4rev2 permits manipulation of mailboxes (remote message
 
19   folders) in a way that is functionally equivalent to local folders.
 
20   IMAP4rev2 also provides the capability for an offline client to
 
21   resynchronize with the server.
 
23   IMAP4rev2 includes operations for creating, deleting, and renaming
 
24   mailboxes; checking for new messages; removing messages permanently;
 
25   setting and clearing flags; parsing per RFCs 5322, 2045, and 2231;
 
26   searching; and selective fetching of message attributes, texts, and
 
27   portions thereof.  Messages in IMAP4rev2 are accessed by the use of
 
28   numbers.  These numbers are either message sequence numbers or unique
 
31   IMAP4rev2 does not specify a means of posting mail; this function is
 
32   handled by a mail submission protocol such as the one specified in
 
37   This is an Internet Standards Track document.
 
39   This document is a product of the Internet Engineering Task Force
 
40   (IETF).  It represents the consensus of the IETF community.  It has
 
41   received public review and has been approved for publication by the
 
42   Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG).  Further information on
 
43   Internet Standards is available in Section 2 of RFC 7841.
 
45   Information about the current status of this document, any errata,
 
46   and how to provide feedback on it may be obtained at
 
47   https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc9051.
 
51   Copyright (c) 2021 IETF Trust and the persons identified as the
 
52   document authors.  All rights reserved.
 
54   This document is subject to BCP 78 and the IETF Trust's Legal
 
55   Provisions Relating to IETF Documents
 
56   (https://trustee.ietf.org/license-info) in effect on the date of
 
57   publication of this document.  Please review these documents
 
58   carefully, as they describe your rights and restrictions with respect
 
59   to this document.  Code Components extracted from this document must
 
60   include Simplified BSD License text as described in Section 4.e of
 
61   the Trust Legal Provisions and are provided without warranty as
 
62   described in the Simplified BSD License.
 
64   This document may contain material from IETF Documents or IETF
 
65   Contributions published or made publicly available before November
 
66   10, 2008.  The person(s) controlling the copyright in some of this
 
67   material may not have granted the IETF Trust the right to allow
 
68   modifications of such material outside the IETF Standards Process.
 
69   Without obtaining an adequate license from the person(s) controlling
 
70   the copyright in such materials, this document may not be modified
 
71   outside the IETF Standards Process, and derivative works of it may
 
72   not be created outside the IETF Standards Process, except to format
 
73   it for publication as an RFC or to translate it into languages other
 
78   1.  How to Read This Document
 
79     1.1.  Organization of This Document
 
80     1.2.  Conventions Used in This Document
 
81     1.3.  Special Notes to Implementors
 
84     2.2.  Commands and Responses
 
85       2.2.1.  Client Protocol Sender and Server Protocol Receiver
 
86       2.2.2.  Server Protocol Sender and Client Protocol Receiver
 
87     2.3.  Message Attributes
 
88       2.3.1.  Message Numbers
 
89       2.3.2.  Flags Message Attribute
 
90       2.3.3.  Internal Date Message Attribute
 
91       2.3.4.  RFC822.SIZE Message Attribute
 
92       2.3.5.  Envelope Structure Message Attribute
 
93       2.3.6.  Body Structure Message Attribute
 
95   3.  State and Flow Diagram
 
96     3.1.  Not Authenticated State
 
97     3.2.  Authenticated State
 
102       4.1.1.  Sequence Set and UID Set
 
105       4.3.1.  8-Bit and Binary Strings
 
106     4.4.  Parenthesized List
 
108   5.  Operational Considerations
 
110       5.1.1.  Mailbox Hierarchy Naming
 
112     5.2.  Mailbox Size and Message Status Updates
 
113     5.3.  Response When No Command in Progress
 
114     5.4.  Autologout Timer
 
115     5.5.  Multiple Commands in Progress (Command Pipelining)
 
117     6.1.  Client Commands - Any State
 
118       6.1.1.  CAPABILITY Command
 
120       6.1.3.  LOGOUT Command
 
121     6.2.  Client Commands - Not Authenticated State
 
122       6.2.1.  STARTTLS Command
 
123       6.2.2.  AUTHENTICATE Command
 
125     6.3.  Client Commands - Authenticated State
 
126       6.3.1.  ENABLE Command
 
127       6.3.2.  SELECT Command
 
128       6.3.3.  EXAMINE Command
 
129       6.3.4.  CREATE Command
 
130       6.3.5.  DELETE Command
 
131       6.3.6.  RENAME Command
 
132       6.3.7.  SUBSCRIBE Command
 
133       6.3.8.  UNSUBSCRIBE Command
 
135       6.3.10. NAMESPACE Command
 
136       6.3.11. STATUS Command
 
137       6.3.12. APPEND Command
 
139     6.4.  Client Commands - Selected State
 
141       6.4.2.  UNSELECT Command
 
142       6.4.3.  EXPUNGE Command
 
143       6.4.4.  SEARCH Command
 
149     6.5.  Client Commands - Experimental/Expansion
 
151     7.1.  Server Responses - Generic Status Responses
 
155       7.1.4.  PREAUTH Response
 
157     7.2.  Server Responses - Server Status
 
158       7.2.1.  ENABLED Response
 
159       7.2.2.  CAPABILITY Response
 
160     7.3.  Server Responses - Mailbox Status
 
162       7.3.2.  NAMESPACE Response
 
163       7.3.3.  STATUS Response
 
164       7.3.4.  ESEARCH Response
 
165       7.3.5.  FLAGS Response
 
166     7.4.  Server Responses - Mailbox Size
 
167       7.4.1.  EXISTS Response
 
168     7.5.  Server Responses - Message Status
 
169       7.5.1.  EXPUNGE Response
 
170       7.5.2.  FETCH Response
 
171     7.6.  Server Responses - Command Continuation Request
 
172   8.  Sample IMAP4rev2 Connection
 
175   11. Security Considerations
 
176     11.1.  TLS-Related Security Considerations
 
177     11.2.  STARTTLS Command versus Use of Implicit TLS Port
 
178     11.3.  Client Handling of Unsolicited Responses Not Suitable for
 
179            the Current Connection State
 
180     11.4.  COPYUID and APPENDUID Response Codes
 
181     11.5.  LIST Command and Other Users' Namespace
 
183     11.7.  Other Security Considerations
 
184   12. IANA Considerations
 
185     12.1.  Updates to IMAP Capabilities Registry
 
186     12.2.  GSSAPI/SASL Service Name
 
187     12.3.  LIST Selection Options, LIST Return Options, and LIST
 
189     12.4.  IMAP Mailbox Name Attributes and IMAP Response Codes
 
191     13.1.  Normative References
 
192     13.2.  Informative References
 
193       13.2.1.  Related Protocols
 
194       13.2.2.  Historical Aspects of IMAP and Related Protocols
 
195   Appendix A.  Backward Compatibility with IMAP4rev1
 
196     A.1.  Mailbox International Naming Convention for Compatibility
 
198   Appendix B.  Backward Compatibility with BINARY Extension
 
199   Appendix C.  Backward Compatibility with LIST-EXTENDED Extension
 
200   Appendix D.  63-Bit Body Part and Message Sizes
 
201   Appendix E.  Changes from RFC 3501 / IMAP4rev1
 
202   Appendix F.  Other Recommended IMAP Extensions
 
2071.  How to Read This Document
 
2091.1.  Organization of This Document
 
211   This document is written from the point of view of the implementor of
 
212   an IMAP4rev2 client or server.  Beyond the protocol overview in
 
213   Section 2, it is not optimized for someone trying to understand the
 
214   operation of the protocol.  The material in Sections 3, 4, and 5
 
215   provides the general context and definitions with which IMAP4rev2
 
218   Sections 6, 7, and 9 describe the IMAP commands, responses, and
 
219   syntax, respectively.  The relationships among these are such that it
 
220   is almost impossible to understand any of them separately.  In
 
221   particular, do not attempt to deduce command syntax from the command
 
222   section alone; instead, refer to "Formal Syntax" (Section 9).
 
2241.2.  Conventions Used in This Document
 
226   "Conventions" are basic principles or procedures.  Document
 
227   conventions are noted in this section.
 
229   In examples, "C:" and "S:" indicate lines sent by the client and
 
230   server, respectively.  Note that each line includes the terminating
 
233   The key words "MUST", "MUST NOT", "REQUIRED", "SHALL", "SHALL NOT",
 
234   "SHOULD", "SHOULD NOT", "RECOMMENDED", "NOT RECOMMENDED", "MAY", and
 
235   "OPTIONAL" in this document are to be interpreted as described in
 
236   BCP 14 [RFC2119] [RFC8174] when, and only when, they appear in all
 
237   capitals, as shown here.
 
239   The word "can" (not "may") is used to refer to a possible
 
240   circumstance or situation, as opposed to an optional facility of the
 
243   "User" is used to refer to a human user, whereas "client" refers to
 
244   the software being run by the user.
 
246   "Connection" refers to the entire sequence of client/server
 
247   interaction from the initial establishment of the network connection
 
248   until its termination.
 
250   "Session" refers to the sequence of client/server interaction from
 
251   the time that a mailbox is selected (SELECT or EXAMINE command) until
 
252   the time that selection ends (SELECT or EXAMINE of another mailbox,
 
253   CLOSE command, UNSELECT command, or connection termination).
 
255   The term "Implicit TLS" refers to the automatic negotiation of TLS
 
256   whenever a TCP connection is made on a particular TCP port that is
 
257   used exclusively by that server for TLS connections.  The term
 
258   "Implicit TLS" is intended to contrast with the use of the STARTTLS
 
259   command in IMAP that is used by the client and the server to
 
260   explicitly negotiate TLS on an established cleartext TCP connection.
 
262   Characters are 8-bit UTF-8 (of which 7-bit US-ASCII is a subset),
 
263   unless otherwise specified.  Other character sets are indicated using
 
264   a "CHARSET", as described in [MIME-IMT] and defined in [CHARSET].
 
265   CHARSETs have important additional semantics in addition to defining
 
266   a character set; refer to these documents for more detail.
 
268   There are several protocol conventions in IMAP.  These refer to
 
269   aspects of the specification that are not strictly part of the IMAP
 
270   protocol but reflect generally accepted practice.  Implementations
 
271   need to be aware of these conventions, and avoid conflicts whether or
 
272   not they implement the convention.  For example, "&" may not be used
 
273   as a hierarchy delimiter since it conflicts with the Mailbox
 
274   International Naming Convention, and other uses of "&" in mailbox
 
275   names are impacted as well.
 
2771.3.  Special Notes to Implementors
 
279   Implementors of the IMAP protocol are strongly encouraged to read the
 
280   IMAP implementation recommendations document [IMAP-IMPLEMENTATION] in
 
281   conjunction with this document, to help understand the intricacies of
 
282   this protocol and how best to build an interoperable product.
 
284   IMAP4rev2 is designed to be upwards compatible from the IMAP4rev1
 
285   [RFC3501], IMAP2 [IMAP2], and unpublished IMAP2bis [IMAP2BIS]
 
286   protocols.  IMAP4rev2 is largely compatible with the IMAP4rev1
 
287   protocol described in RFC 3501 and the IMAP4 protocol described in
 
288   [RFC1730]; the exception being in certain facilities added in
 
289   [RFC1730] and [RFC3501] that proved problematic and were subsequently
 
290   removed or replaced by better alternatives.  In the course of the
 
291   evolution of IMAP4rev2, some aspects in the earlier protocols have
 
292   become obsolete.  Obsolete commands, responses, and data formats that
 
293   an IMAP4rev2 implementation can encounter when used with an earlier
 
294   implementation are described in Appendices A and E and
 
295   [IMAP-OBSOLETE].  IMAP4rev2 supports 63-bit body parts and message
 
296   sizes.  IMAP4rev2 compatibility with BINARY and LIST-EXTENDED IMAP
 
297   extensions are described in Appendices B and C, respectively.
 
299   Other compatibility issues with IMAP2bis, the most common variant of
 
300   the earlier protocol, are discussed in [IMAP-COMPAT].  A full
 
301   discussion of compatibility issues with rare (and presumed extinct)
 
302   variants of [IMAP2] is in [IMAP-HISTORICAL]; this document is
 
303   primarily of historical interest.
 
305   IMAP was originally developed for the older [RFC822] standard, and as
 
306   a consequence, the "RFC822.SIZE" fetch item in IMAP incorporates
 
307   "RFC822" in its name.  "RFC822" should be interpreted as a reference
 
308   to the updated [RFC5322] standard.
 
310   IMAP4rev2 does not specify a means of posting mail; this function is
 
311   handled by a mail submission protocol such as the one specified in
 
318   The IMAP4rev2 protocol assumes a reliable data stream such as that
 
319   provided by TCP.  When TCP is used, an IMAP4rev2 server listens on
 
320   port 143 (cleartext port) or port 993 (Implicit TLS port).
 
3222.2.  Commands and Responses
 
324   An IMAP4rev2 connection consists of the establishment of a client/
 
325   server network connection, an initial greeting from the server, and
 
326   client/server interactions.  These client/server interactions consist
 
327   of a client command, server data, and a server completion result
 
330   All interactions transmitted by client and server are in the form of
 
331   lines, that is, strings that end with a CRLF.  The protocol receiver
 
332   of an IMAP4rev2 client or server is reading either a line or a
 
333   sequence of octets with a known count followed by a line.
 
3352.2.1.  Client Protocol Sender and Server Protocol Receiver
 
337   The client command begins an operation.  Each client command is
 
338   prefixed with an identifier (typically a short alphanumeric string,
 
339   e.g., A0001, A0002, etc.) called a "tag".  A different tag is
 
340   generated by the client for each command.  More formally: the client
 
341   SHOULD generate a unique tag for every command, but a server MUST
 
344   Clients MUST follow the syntax outlined in this specification
 
345   strictly.  It is a syntax error to send a command with missing or
 
346   extraneous spaces or arguments.
 
348   There are two cases in which a line from the client does not
 
349   represent a complete command.  In one case, a command argument is
 
350   quoted with an octet count (see the description of literal in
 
351   Section 4.3); in the other case, the command arguments require server
 
352   feedback (see the AUTHENTICATE command in Section 6.2.2).  In either
 
353   case, the server sends a command continuation request response if it
 
354   is ready for the octets (if appropriate) and the remainder of the
 
355   command.  This response is prefixed with the token "+".
 
357      Note: If, instead, the server detected an error in the command, it
 
358      sends a BAD completion response with a tag matching the command
 
359      (as described below) to reject the command and prevent the client
 
360      from sending any more of the command.
 
362      It is also possible for the server to send a completion response
 
363      for some other command (if multiple commands are in progress) or
 
364      untagged data.  In either case, the command continuation request
 
365      is still pending; the client takes the appropriate action for the
 
366      response and reads another response from the server.  In all
 
367      cases, the client MUST send a complete command (including
 
368      receiving all command continuation request responses and sending
 
369      command continuations for the command) before initiating a new
 
372   The protocol receiver of an IMAP4rev2 server reads a command line
 
373   from the client, parses the command and its arguments, and transmits
 
374   server data and a server command completion result response.
 
3762.2.2.  Server Protocol Sender and Client Protocol Receiver
 
378   Data transmitted by the server to the client and status responses
 
379   that do not indicate command completion are prefixed with the token
 
380   "*" and are called untagged responses.
 
382   Server data MAY be sent as a result of a client command or MAY be
 
383   sent unilaterally by the server.  There is no syntactic difference
 
384   between server data that resulted from a specific command and server
 
385   data that were sent unilaterally.
 
387   The server completion result response indicates the success or
 
388   failure of the operation.  It is tagged with the same tag as the
 
389   client command that began the operation.  Thus, if more than one
 
390   command is in progress, the tag in a server completion response
 
391   identifies the command to which the response applies.  There are
 
392   three possible server completion responses: OK (indicating success),
 
393   NO (indicating failure), or BAD (indicating a protocol error such as
 
394   unrecognized command or command syntax error).
 
396   Servers SHOULD strictly enforce the syntax outlined in this
 
397   specification.  Any client command with a protocol syntax error,
 
398   including (but not limited to) missing or extraneous spaces or
 
399   arguments, SHOULD be rejected and the client given a BAD server
 
402   The protocol receiver of an IMAP4rev2 client reads a response line
 
403   from the server.  It then takes action on the response based upon the
 
404   first token of the response, which can be a tag, a "*", or a "+".
 
406   A client MUST be prepared to accept any server response at all times.
 
407   This includes server data that was not requested.  Server data SHOULD
 
408   be remembered (cached), so that the client can reference its
 
409   remembered copy rather than sending a command to the server to
 
410   request the data.  In the case of certain server data, the data MUST
 
411   be remembered, as specified elsewhere in this document.
 
413   This topic is discussed in greater detail in "Server Responses" (see
 
4162.3.  Message Attributes
 
418   In addition to message text, each message has several attributes
 
419   associated with it.  These attributes can be retrieved individually
 
420   or in conjunction with other attributes or message texts.
 
4222.3.1.  Message Numbers
 
424   Messages in IMAP4rev2 are accessed by one of two numbers: the Unique
 
425   Identifier (UID) or the message sequence number.
 
4272.3.1.1.  Unique Identifier (UID) Message Attribute
 
429   A UID is an unsigned non-zero 32-bit value assigned to each message,
 
430   which when used with the unique identifier validity value (see below)
 
431   forms a 64-bit value that MUST NOT refer to any other message in the
 
432   mailbox or any subsequent mailbox with the same name forever.  Unique
 
433   identifiers are assigned in a strictly ascending fashion in the
 
434   mailbox; as each message is added to the mailbox, it is assigned a
 
435   higher UID than those of all message(s) that are already in the
 
436   mailbox.  Unlike message sequence numbers, unique identifiers are not
 
437   necessarily contiguous.
 
439   The unique identifier of a message MUST NOT change during the session
 
440   and SHOULD NOT change between sessions.  Any change of unique
 
441   identifiers between sessions MUST be detectable using the UIDVALIDITY
 
442   mechanism discussed below.  Persistent unique identifiers are
 
443   required for a client to resynchronize its state from a previous
 
444   session with the server (e.g., disconnected or offline access clients
 
445   [IMAP-MODEL]); this is discussed further in [IMAP-DISC].
 
447   Associated with every mailbox are two 32-bit unsigned non-zero values
 
448   that aid in unique identifier handling: the next unique identifier
 
449   value (UIDNEXT) and the unique identifier validity value
 
452   The next unique identifier value is the predicted value that will be
 
453   assigned to a new message in the mailbox.  Unless the unique
 
454   identifier validity also changes (see below), the next unique
 
455   identifier value MUST have the following two characteristics.  First,
 
456   the next unique identifier value MUST NOT change unless new messages
 
457   are added to the mailbox; and second, the next unique identifier
 
458   value MUST change whenever new messages are added to the mailbox,
 
459   even if those new messages are subsequently expunged.
 
461      |  Note: The next unique identifier value is intended to provide a
 
462      |  means for a client to determine whether any messages have been
 
463      |  delivered to the mailbox since the previous time it checked
 
464      |  this value.  It is not intended to provide any guarantee that
 
465      |  any message will have this unique identifier.  A client can
 
466      |  only assume, at the time that it obtains the next unique
 
467      |  identifier value, that messages arriving after that time will
 
468      |  have a UID greater than or equal to that value.
 
470   The unique identifier validity value is sent in a UIDVALIDITY
 
471   response code in an OK untagged response at mailbox selection time.
 
472   If unique identifiers from an earlier session fail to persist in this
 
473   session, the unique identifier validity value MUST be greater than
 
474   the one used in the earlier session.  A good UIDVALIDITY value to use
 
475   is a 32-bit representation of the current date/time when the value is
 
476   assigned: this ensures that the value is unique and always increases.
 
477   Another possible alternative is a global counter that gets
 
478   incremented every time a mailbox is created.
 
480      Note: Ideally, unique identifiers SHOULD persist at all times.
 
481      Although this specification recognizes that failure to persist can
 
482      be unavoidable in certain server environments, it strongly
 
483      encourages message store implementation techniques that avoid this
 
484      problem.  For example:
 
486   1.  Unique identifiers MUST be strictly ascending in the mailbox at
 
487       all times.  If the physical message store is reordered by a non-
 
488       IMAP agent, the unique identifiers in the mailbox MUST be
 
489       regenerated, since the former unique identifiers are no longer
 
490       strictly ascending as a result of the reordering.
 
492   2.  If the message store has no mechanism to store unique
 
493       identifiers, it must regenerate unique identifiers at each
 
494       session, and each session must have a unique UIDVALIDITY value.
 
495       Note that this situation can be very disruptive to client message
 
498   3.  If the mailbox is deleted/renamed and a new mailbox with the same
 
499       name is created at a later date, the server must either keep
 
500       track of unique identifiers from the previous instance of the
 
501       mailbox or assign a new UIDVALIDITY value to the new instance of
 
504   4.  The combination of mailbox name, UIDVALIDITY, and UID must refer
 
505       to a single, immutable (or expunged) message on that server
 
506       forever.  In particular, the internal date, RFC822.SIZE,
 
507       envelope, body structure, and message texts (all BODY[...] fetch
 
508       data items) MUST never change.  This does not include message
 
509       numbers, nor does it include attributes that can be set by a
 
510       STORE command (such as FLAGS).  When a message is expunged, its
 
511       UID MUST NOT be reused under the same UIDVALIDITY value.
 
5132.3.1.2.  Message Sequence Number Message Attribute
 
515   A message sequence number is a relative position from 1 to the number
 
516   of messages in the mailbox.  This position MUST be ordered by
 
517   ascending unique identifiers.  As each new message is added, it is
 
518   assigned a message sequence number that is 1 higher than the number
 
519   of messages in the mailbox before that new message was added.
 
521   Message sequence numbers can be reassigned during the session.  For
 
522   example, when a message is permanently removed (expunged) from the
 
523   mailbox, the message sequence number for all subsequent messages is
 
524   decremented.  The number of messages in the mailbox is also
 
525   decremented.  Similarly, a new message can be assigned a message
 
526   sequence number that was once held by some other message prior to an
 
529   In addition to accessing messages by relative position in the
 
530   mailbox, message sequence numbers can be used in mathematical
 
531   calculations.  For example, if an untagged "11 EXISTS" is received,
 
532   and previously an untagged "8 EXISTS" was received, three new
 
533   messages have arrived with message sequence numbers of 9, 10, and 11.
 
534   As another example, if message 287 in a 523-message mailbox has UID
 
535   12345, there are exactly 286 messages that have lesser UIDs and 236
 
536   messages that have greater UIDs.
 
5382.3.2.  Flags Message Attribute
 
540   A message has a list of zero or more named tokens, known as "flags",
 
541   associated with it.  A flag is set by its addition to this list and
 
542   is cleared by its removal.  There are two types of flags in
 
543   IMAP4rev2: system flags and keywords.  A flag of either type can be
 
544   permanent or session-only.
 
546   A system flag is a flag name that is predefined in this specification
 
547   and begins with "\".  Certain system flags (\Deleted and \Seen) have
 
548   special semantics described elsewhere in this document.  The
 
549   currently defined system flags are:
 
551   \Seen         Message has been read
 
553   \Answered     Message has been answered
 
555   \Flagged      Message is "flagged" for urgent/special attention
 
557   \Deleted      Message is "deleted" for removal by later EXPUNGE
 
559   \Draft        Message has not completed composition (marked as a
 
562   \Recent       This flag was in use in IMAP4rev1 and is now
 
565   A keyword is defined by the server implementation.  Keywords do not
 
566   begin with "\".  Servers MAY permit the client to define new keywords
 
567   in the mailbox (see the description of the PERMANENTFLAGS response
 
568   code for more information).  Some keywords that start with "$" are
 
569   also defined in this specification.
 
571   This document defines several keywords that were not originally
 
572   defined in [RFC3501] but were found to be useful by client
 
573   implementations.  These keywords SHOULD be supported (allowed in
 
574   SEARCH and allowed and preserved in APPEND, COPY, and MOVE commands)
 
575   by server implementations:
 
578      Message has been forwarded to another email address by being
 
579      embedded within, or attached to a new message.  An email client
 
580      sets this keyword when it successfully forwards the message to
 
581      another email address.  Typical usage of this keyword is to show a
 
582      different (or additional) icon for a message that has been
 
583      forwarded.  Once set, the flag SHOULD NOT be cleared.
 
586      Message Disposition Notification [RFC8098] was generated and sent
 
587      for this message.  See [RFC3503] for more details on how this
 
588      keyword is used and for requirements on clients and servers.
 
591      The user (or a delivery agent on behalf of the user) may choose to
 
592      mark a message as definitely containing junk ($Junk; see also the
 
593      related keyword $NotJunk).  The $Junk keyword can be used to mark,
 
594      group, or hide undesirable messages (and such messages might be
 
595      moved or deleted later).  See [IMAP-KEYWORDS-REG] for more
 
599      The user (or a delivery agent on behalf of the user) may choose to
 
600      mark a message as definitely not containing junk ($NotJunk; see
 
601      also the related keyword $Junk).  The $NotJunk keyword can be used
 
602      to mark, group, or show messages that the user wants to see.  See
 
603      [IMAP-KEYWORDS-REG] for more information.
 
606      The $Phishing keyword can be used by a delivery agent to mark a
 
607      message as highly likely to be a phishing email.  A message that's
 
608      determined to be a phishing email by the delivery agent should
 
609      also be considered a junk email and have the appropriate junk
 
610      filtering applied, including setting the $Junk flag and placing
 
611      the message in the \Junk special-use mailbox (see Section 7.3.1),
 
614      If both the $Phishing flag and the $Junk flag are set, the user
 
615      agent should display an additional warning message to the user.
 
616      Additionally, the user agent might display a warning, such as
 
617      something of the form, "This message may be trying to steal your
 
618      personal information," when the user clicks on any hyperlinks
 
621      The requirement for both $Phishing and $Junk to be set before a
 
622      user agent displays a warning is for better backwards
 
623      compatibility with existing clients that understand the $Junk flag
 
624      but not the $Phishing flag.  This is so that when an unextended
 
625      client removes the $Junk flag, an extended client will also show
 
626      the correct state.  See [IMAP-KEYWORDS-REG] for more information.
 
628   $Junk and $NotJunk are mutually exclusive.  If more than one of these
 
629   is set for a message, the client MUST treat it as if none are set,
 
630   and it SHOULD unset both of them on the IMAP server.
 
632   Other registered keywords can be found in the "IMAP and JMAP
 
633   Keywords" registry [IMAP-KEYWORDS-REG].  New keywords SHOULD be
 
634   registered in this registry using the procedure specified in
 
637   A flag can be permanent or session-only on a per-flag basis.
 
638   Permanent flags are those that the client can add or remove from the
 
639   message flags permanently; that is, concurrent and subsequent
 
640   sessions will see any change in permanent flags.  Changes to session
 
641   flags are valid only in that session.
 
6432.3.3.  Internal Date Message Attribute
 
645   An Internal Date message attribute is the internal date and time of
 
646   the message on the server.  This is not the date and time in the
 
647   [RFC5322] header but rather a date and time that reflects when the
 
648   message was received.  In the case of messages delivered via [SMTP],
 
649   this is the date and time of final delivery of the message as defined
 
650   by [SMTP].  In the case of messages created by the IMAP4rev2 COPY or
 
651   MOVE command, this SHOULD be the same as the Internal Date attribute
 
652   of the source message.  In the case of messages created by the
 
653   IMAP4rev2 APPEND command, this SHOULD be the date and time as
 
654   specified in the APPEND command description.  All other cases are
 
655   implementation defined.
 
6572.3.4.  RFC822.SIZE Message Attribute
 
659   RFC822.SIZE is the number of octets in the message when the message
 
660   is expressed in [RFC5322] format.  This size SHOULD match the result
 
661   of a "FETCH BODY[]" command.  If the message is internally stored in
 
662   some other format, the server calculates the size and often stores it
 
663   for later use to avoid the need for recalculation.
 
6652.3.5.  Envelope Structure Message Attribute
 
667   An envelope structure is a parsed representation of the [RFC5322]
 
668   header of the message.  Note that the IMAP envelope structure is not
 
669   the same as an [SMTP] envelope.
 
6712.3.6.  Body Structure Message Attribute
 
673   A body structure is a parsed representation of the [MIME-IMB] body
 
674   structure information of the message.
 
678   In addition to being able to fetch the full [RFC5322] text of a
 
679   message, IMAP4rev2 permits the fetching of portions of the full
 
680   message text.  Specifically, it is possible to fetch the [RFC5322]
 
681   message header, the [RFC5322] message body, a [MIME-IMB] body part,
 
682   or a [MIME-IMB] header.
 
6843.  State and Flow Diagram
 
686   Once the connection between client and server is established, an
 
687   IMAP4rev2 connection is in one of four states.  The initial state is
 
688   identified in the server greeting.  Most commands are only valid in
 
689   certain states.  It is a protocol error for the client to attempt a
 
690   command while the connection is in an inappropriate state, and the
 
691   server will respond with a BAD or NO (depending upon server
 
692   implementation) command completion result.
 
6943.1.  Not Authenticated State
 
696   In the not authenticated state, the client MUST supply authentication
 
697   credentials before most commands will be permitted.  This state is
 
698   entered when a connection starts unless the connection has been pre-
 
7013.2.  Authenticated State
 
703   In the authenticated state, the client is authenticated and MUST
 
704   select a mailbox to access before commands that affect messages will
 
705   be permitted.  This state is entered when a pre-authenticated
 
706   connection starts, when acceptable authentication credentials have
 
707   been provided, after an error in selecting a mailbox, or after a
 
708   successful CLOSE or UNSELECT command.
 
712   In a selected state, a mailbox has been selected to access.  This
 
713   state is entered when a mailbox has been successfully selected.
 
717   In the logout state, the connection is being terminated.  This state
 
718   can be entered as a result of a client request (via the LOGOUT
 
719   command) or by unilateral action on the part of either the client or
 
722   If the client requests the logout state, the server MUST send an
 
723   untagged BYE response and a tagged OK response to the LOGOUT command
 
724   before the server closes the connection; and the client MUST read the
 
725   tagged OK response to the LOGOUT command before the client closes the
 
728   A server SHOULD NOT unilaterally close the connection without first
 
729   sending an untagged BYE response that contains the reason for doing
 
730   so.  A client SHOULD NOT unilaterally close the connection; instead,
 
731   it SHOULD issue a LOGOUT command.  If the server detects that the
 
732   client has unilaterally closed the connection, the server MAY omit
 
733   the untagged BYE response and simply close its connection.
 
735                      +----------------------+
 
736                      |connection established|
 
737                      +----------------------+
 
740               +--------------------------------------+
 
742               +--------------------------------------+
 
745               +-----------------+    ||            ||
 
746               |Not Authenticated|    ||            ||
 
747               +-----------------+    ||            ||
 
750                ||     +----------------+           ||
 
751                ||     | Authenticated  |<=++       ||
 
752                ||     +----------------+  ||       ||
 
753                ||       || (7)   || (5)   || (6)   ||
 
755                ||       ||    +--------+  ||       ||
 
756                ||       ||    |Selected|==++       ||
 
760               +--------------------------------------+
 
762               +--------------------------------------+
 
765                   +-------------------------------+
 
766                   |both sides close the connection|
 
767                   +-------------------------------+
 
769   Legend for the above diagram:
 
771   (1)  connection without pre-authentication (OK greeting)
 
772   (2)  pre-authenticated connection (PREAUTH greeting)
 
773   (3)  rejected connection (BYE greeting)
 
774   (4)  successful LOGIN or AUTHENTICATE command
 
775   (5)  successful SELECT or EXAMINE command
 
776   (6)  CLOSE or UNSELECT command, unsolicited CLOSED response code, or
 
777        failed SELECT or EXAMINE command
 
778   (7)  LOGOUT command, server shutdown, or connection closed
 
782   IMAP4rev2 uses textual commands and responses.  Data in IMAP4rev2 can
 
783   be in one of several forms: atom, number, string, parenthesized list,
 
784   or NIL.  Note that a particular data item may take more than one
 
785   form; for example, a data item defined as using "astring" syntax may
 
786   be either an atom or a string.
 
790   An atom consists of one or more non-special characters.
 
7924.1.1.  Sequence Set and UID Set
 
794   A set of messages can be referenced by a sequence set containing
 
795   either message sequence numbers or unique identifiers.  See Section 9
 
796   for details.  A sequence set can contain ranges of sequence numbers
 
797   (such as "5:50"), an enumeration of specific sequence numbers, or a
 
798   combination of the above.  A sequence set can use the special symbol
 
800   sequence set never contains unique identifiers.
 
802   A "UID set" is similar to the sequence set, but uses unique
 
803   identifiers instead of message sequence numbers, and is not permitted
 
804   to contain the special symbol "*".
 
808   A number consists of one or more digit characters and represents a
 
813   A string is in one of three forms: synchronizing literal, non-
 
814   synchronizing literal, or quoted string.  The synchronizing literal
 
815   form is the general form of a string, without limitation on the
 
816   characters the string may include.  The non-synchronizing literal
 
817   form is also the general form, but it has a length restriction.  The
 
818   quoted string form is an alternative that avoids the overhead of
 
819   processing a literal, but has limitations on the characters that may
 
822   When the distinction between synchronizing and non-synchronizing
 
823   literals is not important, this document only uses the term
 
826   A synchronizing literal is a sequence of zero or more octets
 
827   (including CR and LF), prefix-quoted with an octet count in the form
 
828   of an open brace ("{"), the number of octets, a close brace ("}"),
 
829   and a CRLF.  In the case of synchronizing literals transmitted from
 
830   server to client, the CRLF is immediately followed by the octet data.
 
831   In the case of synchronizing literals transmitted from client to
 
832   server, the client MUST wait to receive a command continuation
 
833   request (described later in this document) before sending the octet
 
834   data (and the remainder of the command).
 
836   The non-synchronizing literal is an alternative form of synchronizing
 
837   literal and may be used from client to server anywhere a
 
838   synchronizing literal is permitted.  The non-synchronizing literal
 
839   form MUST NOT be sent from server to client.  The non-synchronizing
 
840   literal is distinguished from the synchronizing literal by having a
 
841   plus ("+") between the octet count and the closing brace ("}").  The
 
842   server does not generate a command continuation request in response
 
843   to a non-synchronizing literal, and clients are not required to wait
 
844   before sending the octets of a non-synchronizing literal.  Unless
 
845   otherwise specified in an IMAP extension, non-synchronizing literals
 
846   MUST NOT be larger than 4096 octets.  Any literal larger than 4096
 
847   bytes MUST be sent as a synchronizing literal.  (Non-synchronizing
 
848   literals defined in this document are the same as non-synchronizing
 
849   literals defined by the LITERAL- extension from [RFC7888].  See that
 
850   document for details on how to handle invalid non-synchronizing
 
851   literals longer than 4096 octets and for interaction with other IMAP
 
854   A quoted string is a sequence of zero or more Unicode characters,
 
855   excluding CR and LF, encoded in UTF-8, with double quote (<">)
 
856   characters at each end.
 
858   The empty string is represented as "" (a quoted string with zero
 
859   characters between double quotes), as {0} followed by a CRLF (a
 
860   synchronizing literal with an octet count of 0), or as {0+} followed
 
861   by a CRLF (a non-synchronizing literal with an octet count of 0).
 
863      Note: Even if the octet count is 0, a client transmitting a
 
864      synchronizing literal MUST wait to receive a command continuation
 
8674.3.1.  8-Bit and Binary Strings
 
869   8-bit textual and binary mail is supported through the use of a
 
870   [MIME-IMB] content transfer encoding.  IMAP4rev2 implementations MAY
 
871   transmit 8-bit or multi-octet characters in literals but SHOULD do so
 
872   only when the [CHARSET] is identified.
 
874   IMAP4rev2 is compatible with [I18N-HDRS].  As a result, the
 
875   identified charset for header-field values with 8-bit content is
 
876   UTF-8 [UTF-8].  IMAP4rev2 implementations MUST accept and MAY
 
877   transmit [UTF-8] text in quoted-strings as long as the string does
 
878   not contain NUL, CR, or LF.  This differs from IMAP4rev1
 
881   Although a BINARY content transfer encoding is defined, unencoded
 
882   binary strings are not permitted, unless returned in a <literal8> in
 
883   response to a BINARY.PEEK[<section-binary>]<<partial>> or
 
884   BINARY[<section-binary>]<<partial>> FETCH data item.  A "binary
 
885   string" is any string with NUL characters.  A string with an
 
886   excessive amount of CTL characters MAY also be considered to be
 
887   binary.  Unless returned in response to BINARY.PEEK[...]/BINARY[...]
 
888   FETCH, client and server implementations MUST encode binary data into
 
889   a textual form, such as base64, before transmitting the data.
 
8914.4.  Parenthesized List
 
893   Data structures are represented as a "parenthesized list"; a sequence
 
894   of data items, delimited by space, and bounded at each end by
 
895   parentheses.  A parenthesized list can contain other parenthesized
 
896   lists, using multiple levels of parentheses to indicate nesting.
 
898   The empty list is represented as () -- a parenthesized list with no
 
903   The special form "NIL" represents the non-existence of a particular
 
904   data item that is represented as a string or parenthesized list, as
 
905   distinct from the empty string "" or the empty parenthesized list ().
 
907      |  Note: NIL is never used for any data item that takes the form
 
908      |  of an atom.  For example, a mailbox name of "NIL" is a mailbox
 
909      |  named NIL as opposed to a non-existent mailbox name.  This is
 
910      |  because mailbox uses "astring" syntax, which is an atom or a
 
911      |  string.  Conversely, an addr-name of NIL is a non-existent
 
912      |  personal name, because addr-name uses "nstring" syntax, which
 
913      |  is NIL or a string, but never an atom.
 
917   The following LIST response:
 
925   as LIST response ABNF is using "astring" for mailbox name.
 
927   However, the following response:
 
929     * FETCH 1 (BODY[1] NIL)
 
931   is not equivalent to:
 
933     * FETCH 1 (BODY[1] "NIL")
 
935   The former indicates absence of the body part, while the latter means
 
936   that it contains a string with the three characters "NIL".
 
9385.  Operational Considerations
 
940   The following rules are listed here to ensure that all IMAP4rev2
 
941   implementations interoperate properly.
 
945   In IMAP4rev2, mailbox names are encoded in Net-Unicode [NET-UNICODE]
 
946   (this differs from IMAP4rev1).  Client implementations MAY attempt to
 
947   create Net-Unicode mailbox names and MUST interpret any 8-bit mailbox
 
948   names returned by LIST as [NET-UNICODE].  Server implementations MUST
 
949   prohibit the creation of 8-bit mailbox names that do not comply with
 
950   Net-Unicode.  However, servers MAY accept a denormalized UTF-8
 
951   mailbox name and convert it to Unicode Normalization Form C (NFC) (as
 
952   per Net-Unicode requirements) prior to mailbox creation.  Servers
 
953   that choose to accept such denormalized UTF-8 mailbox names MUST
 
954   accept them in all IMAP commands that have a mailbox name parameter.
 
955   In particular, SELECT <name> must open the same mailbox that was
 
956   successfully created with CREATE <name>, even if <name> is a
 
957   denormalized UTF-8 mailbox name.
 
959   The case-insensitive mailbox name INBOX is a special name reserved to
 
960   mean "the primary mailbox for this user on this server".  (Note that
 
961   this special name might not exist on some servers for some users, for
 
962   example, if the user has no access to personal namespace.)  The
 
963   interpretation of all other names is implementation dependent.
 
965   In particular, this specification takes no position on case
 
966   sensitivity in non-INBOX mailbox names.  Some server implementations
 
967   are fully case sensitive in ASCII range; others preserve the case of
 
968   a newly created name but otherwise are case insensitive; and yet
 
969   others coerce names to a particular case.  Client implementations
 
970   must be able to interact with any of these.
 
972   There are certain client considerations when creating a new mailbox
 
975   1.  Any character that is one of the atom-specials (see "Formal
 
976       Syntax" in Section 9) will require that the mailbox name be
 
977       represented as a quoted string or literal.
 
980       in a user interface and are best avoided.  Servers MAY refuse to
 
981       create mailbox names containing Unicode CTL characters.
 
984       a mailbox name, it is difficult to use such mailbox names with
 
985       the LIST command due to the conflict with wildcard
 
988   4.  Usually, a character (determined by the server implementation) is
 
989       reserved to delimit levels of hierarchy.
 
992       should be avoided except when used in that convention.  See
 
993       Section 5.1.2.1 and Appendix A.1, respectively.
 
9955.1.1.  Mailbox Hierarchy Naming
 
997   If it is desired to export hierarchical mailbox names, mailbox names
 
998   MUST be left-to-right hierarchical, using a single ASCII character to
 
999   separate levels of hierarchy.  The same hierarchy separator character
 
1000   is used for all levels of hierarchy within a single name.
 
1005      A namespace that the server considers within the personal scope of
 
1006      the authenticated user on a particular connection.  Typically,
 
1007      only the authenticated user has access to mailboxes in their
 
1008      Personal Namespace.  It is the part of the namespace that belongs
 
1009      to the user and is allocated for mailboxes.  If an INBOX exists
 
1010      for a user, it MUST appear within the user's Personal Namespace.
 
1011      In the typical case, there SHOULD be only one Personal Namespace
 
1012      per user on a server.
 
1014   Other Users' Namespace:
 
1015      A namespace that consists of mailboxes from the Personal
 
1016      Namespaces of other users.  To access mailboxes in the Other
 
1017      Users' Namespace, the currently authenticated user MUST be
 
1018      explicitly granted access rights.  For example, it is common for a
 
1019      manager to grant to their administrative support staff access
 
1020      rights to their mailbox.  In the typical case, there SHOULD be
 
1021      only one Other Users' Namespace per user on a server.
 
1024      A namespace that consists of mailboxes that are intended to be
 
1025      shared amongst users and do not exist within a user's Personal
 
1028   The namespaces a server uses MAY differ on a per-user basis.
 
10305.1.2.1.  Historic Mailbox Namespace Naming Convention
 
1032   By convention, the first hierarchical element of any mailbox name
 
1033   that begins with "#" identifies the "namespace" of the remainder of
 
1034   the name.  This makes it possible to disambiguate between different
 
1035   types of mailbox stores, each of which have their own namespaces.
 
1037      For example, implementations that offer access to USENET
 
1038      newsgroups MAY use the "#news" namespace to partition the USENET
 
1039      newsgroup namespace from that of other mailboxes.  Thus, the
 
1040      comp.mail.misc newsgroup would have a mailbox name of
 
1041      "#news.comp.mail.misc", and the name "comp.mail.misc" can refer to
 
1042      a different object (e.g., a user's private mailbox).
 
1044   Namespaces that include the "#" character are not IMAP URL [IMAP-URL]
 
1045   friendly and require the "#" character to be represented as %23 when
 
1046   within URLs.  As such, server implementors MAY instead consider using
 
1047   namespace prefixes that do not contain the "#" character.
 
10495.1.2.2.  Common Namespace Models
 
1051   The previous version of this protocol did not define a default server
 
1052   namespace.  Two common namespace models have evolved:
 
1054   The "Personal Mailbox" model, in which the default namespace that is
 
1055   presented consists of only the user's personal mailboxes.  To access
 
1056   shared mailboxes, the user must use an escape mechanism to reach
 
1059   The "Complete Hierarchy" model, in which the default namespace that
 
1060   is presented includes the user's personal mailboxes along with any
 
1061   other mailboxes they have access to.
 
10635.2.  Mailbox Size and Message Status Updates
 
1065   At any time, a server can send data that the client did not request.
 
1066   Sometimes, such behavior is required by this specification and/or
 
1067   extensions.  For example, agents other than the server may add
 
1068   messages to the mailbox (e.g., new message delivery); change the
 
1069   flags of the messages in the mailbox (e.g., simultaneous access to
 
1070   the same mailbox by multiple agents); or even remove messages from
 
1071   the mailbox.  A server MUST send mailbox size updates automatically
 
1072   if a mailbox size change is observed during the processing of a
 
1073   command.  A server SHOULD send message flag updates automatically,
 
1074   without requiring the client to request such updates explicitly.
 
1076   Special rules exist for server notification of a client about the
 
1077   removal of messages to prevent synchronization errors; see the
 
1078   description of the EXPUNGE response (Section 7.5.1) for more detail.
 
1079   In particular, it is NOT permitted to send an EXISTS response that
 
1080   would reduce the number of messages in the mailbox; only the EXPUNGE
 
1081   response can do this.
 
1083   Regardless of what implementation decisions a client makes on
 
1084   remembering data from the server, a client implementation MUST
 
1085   remember mailbox size updates.  It MUST NOT assume that any command
 
1086   after the initial mailbox selection will return the size of the
 
10895.3.  Response When No Command in Progress
 
1091   Server implementations are permitted to send an untagged response
 
1092   (except for EXPUNGE) while there is no command in progress.  Server
 
1093   implementations that send such responses MUST deal with flow control
 
1094   considerations.  Specifically, they MUST either (1) verify that the
 
1095   size of the data does not exceed the underlying transport's available
 
1096   window size or (2) use non-blocking writes.
 
10985.4.  Autologout Timer
 
1100   If a server has an inactivity autologout timer that applies to
 
1101   sessions after authentication, the duration of that timer MUST be at
 
1102   least 30 minutes.  The receipt of any command from the client during
 
1103   that interval resets the autologout timer.
 
1105   Note that this specification doesn't have any restrictions on an
 
1106   autologout timer used before successful client authentication.  In
 
1107   particular, servers are allowed to use a shortened pre-authentication
 
1108   timer to protect themselves from Denial-of-Service attacks.
 
1112   The client MAY send another command without waiting for the
 
1113   completion result response of a command, subject to ambiguity rules
 
1114   (see below) and flow control constraints on the underlying data
 
1115   stream.  Similarly, a server MAY begin processing another command
 
1116   before processing the current command to completion, subject to
 
1117   ambiguity rules.  However, any command continuation request responses
 
1118   and command continuations MUST be negotiated before any subsequent
 
1119   command is initiated.
 
1121   The exception is if an ambiguity would result because of a command
 
1122   that would affect the results of other commands.  If the server
 
1123   detects a possible ambiguity, it MUST execute commands to completion
 
1124   in the order given by the client.
 
1126   The most obvious example of ambiguity is when a command would affect
 
1127   the results of another command.  One example is a FETCH that would
 
1128   cause \Seen flags to be set and a SEARCH UNSEEN command.
 
1130   A non-obvious ambiguity occurs with commands that permit an untagged
 
1131   EXPUNGE response (commands other than FETCH, STORE, and SEARCH),
 
1132   since an untagged EXPUNGE response can invalidate sequence numbers in
 
1133   a subsequent command.  This is not a problem for FETCH, STORE, or
 
1134   SEARCH commands because servers are prohibited from sending EXPUNGE
 
1135   responses while any of those commands are in progress.  Therefore, if
 
1136   the client sends any command other than FETCH, STORE, or SEARCH, it
 
1137   MUST wait for the completion result response before sending a command
 
1138   with message sequence numbers.
 
1140      Note: EXPUNGE responses are permitted while UID FETCH, UID STORE,
 
1141      and UID SEARCH are in progress.  If the client sends a UID
 
1142      command, it MUST wait for a completion result response before
 
1143      sending a command that uses message sequence numbers (this may
 
1144      include UID SEARCH).  Any message sequence numbers in an argument
 
1145      to UID SEARCH are associated with messages prior to the effect of
 
1146      any untagged EXPUNGE responses returned by the UID SEARCH.
 
1148   For example, the following non-waiting command sequences are invalid:
 
1150      FETCH + NOOP + STORE
 
1152      STORE + COPY + FETCH
 
1156   The following are examples of valid non-waiting command sequences:
 
1158      FETCH + STORE + SEARCH + NOOP
 
1160      STORE + COPY + EXPUNGE
 
1162   UID SEARCH + UID SEARCH may be valid or invalid as a non-waiting
 
1163   command sequence, depending upon whether or not the second UID SEARCH
 
1164   contains message sequence numbers.
 
1166   Use of a SEARCH result variable (see Section 6.4.4.1) creates direct
 
1167   dependency between two commands.  See Section 6.4.4.2 for more
 
1168   considerations about pipelining such dependent commands.
 
1172   IMAP4rev2 commands are described in this section.  Commands are
 
1173   organized by the state in which the command is permitted.  Commands
 
1174   that are permitted in multiple states are listed in the minimum
 
1175   permitted state (for example, commands valid in authenticated and
 
1176   selected states are listed in the authenticated state commands).
 
1178   Command arguments, identified by "Arguments:" in the command
 
1179   descriptions below, are described by function, not by syntax.  The
 
1180   precise syntax of command arguments is described in "Formal Syntax"
 
1183   Some commands cause specific server responses to be returned; these
 
1184   are identified by "Responses:" in the command descriptions below.
 
1185   See the response descriptions in "Responses" (Section 7) for
 
1186   information on these responses and in "Formal Syntax" (Section 9) for
 
1187   the precise syntax of these responses.  It is possible for server
 
1188   data to be transmitted as a result of any command.  Thus, commands
 
1189   that do not specifically require server data specify "no specific
 
1190   responses for this command" instead of "none".
 
1192   The "Result:" in the command description refers to the possible
 
1193   tagged status responses to a command and any special interpretation
 
1194   of these status responses.
 
1196   The state of a connection is only changed by successful commands that
 
1197   are documented as changing state.  A rejected command (BAD response)
 
1198   never changes the state of the connection or of the selected mailbox.
 
1199   A failed command (NO response) generally does not change the state of
 
1200   the connection or of the selected mailbox, with the exception of the
 
1201   SELECT and EXAMINE commands.
 
12036.1.  Client Commands - Any State
 
1205   The following commands are valid in any state: CAPABILITY, NOOP, and
 
1212   Responses:    REQUIRED untagged response:  CAPABILITY
 
1214   Result:       OK -  capability completed
 
1215                 BAD -  arguments invalid
 
1217   The CAPABILITY command requests a listing of capabilities (e.g.,
 
1218   extensions and/or modifications of server behavior) that the server
 
1219   supports.  The server MUST send a single untagged CAPABILITY response
 
1220   with "IMAP4rev2" as one of the listed capabilities before the
 
1221   (tagged) OK response.
 
1223   A capability name that begins with "AUTH=" indicates that the server
 
1224   supports that particular authentication mechanism as defined in the
 
1225   Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL) [SASL].  All such
 
1226   names are, by definition, part of this specification.
 
1228   Other capability names refer to extensions, revisions, or amendments
 
1229   to this specification.  See the documentation of the CAPABILITY
 
1230   response in Section 7.2.2 for additional information.  If IMAP4rev1
 
1231   capability is not advertised, no capabilities, beyond the base
 
1232   IMAP4rev2 set defined in this specification, are enabled without
 
1233   explicit client action to invoke the capability.  If both IMAP4rev1
 
1234   and IMAP4rev2 capabilities are advertised, no capabilities, beyond
 
1235   the base IMAP4rev1 set specified in [RFC3501], are enabled without
 
1236   explicit client action to invoke the capability.
 
1239   (Section 6.2.1) and LOGINDISABLED capabilities on cleartext ports.
 
1240   Client and server implementations MUST also implement AUTH=PLAIN
 
1241   (described in [PLAIN]) capability on both cleartext and Implicit TLS
 
1242   ports.  See the Security Considerations (Section 11) for important
 
1245   Unless otherwise specified, all registered extensions to IMAP4rev1
 
1246   are also valid extensions to IMAP4rev2.
 
1251     S: * CAPABILITY IMAP4rev2 STARTTLS AUTH=GSSAPI
 
1253     S: abcd OK CAPABILITY completed
 
1255     S: efgh OK STARTTLS completed
 
1256     <TLS negotiation, further commands are under TLS layer>
 
1258     S: * CAPABILITY IMAP4rev2 AUTH=GSSAPI AUTH=PLAIN
 
1259     S: ijkl OK CAPABILITY completed
 
1265   Responses:    no specific responses for this command (but see below)
 
1267   Result:       OK -  noop completed
 
1268                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
1270   The NOOP command always succeeds.  It does nothing.
 
1272   Since any command can return a status update as untagged data, the
 
1273   NOOP command can be used as a periodic poll for new messages or
 
1274   message status updates during a period of inactivity (the IDLE
 
1275   command; see Section 6.3.13) should be used instead of NOOP if real-
 
1276   time updates to mailbox state are desirable).  The NOOP command can
 
1277   also be used to reset any inactivity autologout timer on the server.
 
1282     S: a002 OK NOOP completed
 
1287     S: * 14 FETCH (UID 1305 FLAGS (\Seen \Deleted))
 
1288     S: a047 OK NOOP completed
 
1294   Responses:    REQUIRED untagged response:  BYE
 
1296   Result:       OK -  logout completed
 
1297                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
1299   The LOGOUT command informs the server that the client is done with
 
1300   the connection.  The server MUST send a BYE untagged response before
 
1301   the (tagged) OK response, and then close the network connection.
 
1306     S: * BYE IMAP4rev2 Server logging out
 
1307     S: A023 OK LOGOUT completed
 
1308     (Server and client then close the connection)
 
13106.2.  Client Commands - Not Authenticated State
 
1312   In the not authenticated state, the AUTHENTICATE or LOGIN command
 
1313   establishes authentication and enters the authenticated state.  The
 
1314   AUTHENTICATE command provides a general mechanism for a variety of
 
1315   authentication techniques, privacy protection, and integrity
 
1316   checking, whereas the LOGIN command uses a conventional user name and
 
1317   plaintext password pair and has no means of establishing privacy
 
1318   protection or integrity checking.
 
1320   The STARTTLS command is an alternative form of establishing session
 
1321   privacy protection and integrity checking but does not by itself
 
1322   establish authentication or enter the authenticated state.
 
1324   Server implementations MAY allow access to certain mailboxes without
 
1325   establishing authentication.  This can be done by means of the
 
1326   ANONYMOUS [SASL] authenticator described in [ANONYMOUS].  An older
 
1327   convention is a LOGIN command using the userid "anonymous"; in this
 
1328   case, a password is required although the server may choose to accept
 
1329   any password.  The restrictions placed on anonymous users are
 
1330   implementation dependent.
 
1332   Once authenticated (including as anonymous), it is not possible to
 
1333   re-enter not authenticated state.
 
1335   In addition to the universal commands (CAPABILITY, NOOP, and LOGOUT),
 
1336   the following commands are valid in the not authenticated state:
 
1337   STARTTLS, AUTHENTICATE, and LOGIN.  See the Security Considerations
 
1338   (Section 11) for important information about these commands.
 
1344   Responses:    no specific response for this command
 
1346   Result:       OK -  starttls completed, begin TLS negotiation
 
1347                 NO -  TLS negotiation can't be initiated, due to server
 
1349                 BAD -  STARTTLS received after a successful TLS
 
1350                    negotiation or arguments invalid
 
1352   Note that the STARTTLS command is available only on cleartext ports.
 
1354   STARTTLS command is received on an Implicit TLS port.
 
1356   A TLS [TLS-1.3] negotiation begins immediately after the CRLF at the
 
1357   end of the tagged OK response from the server.  Once a client issues
 
1358   a STARTTLS command, it MUST NOT issue further commands until a server
 
1359   response is seen and the TLS negotiation is complete.  Some past
 
1360   server implementations incorrectly implemented STARTTLS processing
 
1361   and are known to contain STARTTLS plaintext command injection
 
1362   vulnerability [CERT-555316].  In order to avoid this vulnerability,
 
1363   server implementations MUST do one of the following if any data is
 
1364   received in the same TCP buffer after the CRLF that starts the
 
1367   1.  Extra data from the TCP buffer is interpreted as the beginning of
 
1368       the TLS handshake.  (If the data is in cleartext, this will
 
1369       result in the TLS handshake failing.)
 
1371   2.  Extra data from the TCP buffer is thrown away.
 
1373   Note that the first option is friendlier to clients that pipeline the
 
1374   beginning of the STARTTLS command with TLS handshake data.
 
1376   After successful TLS negotiation, the server remains in the non-
 
1377   authenticated state, even if client credentials are supplied during
 
1378   the TLS negotiation.  This does not preclude an authentication
 
1379   mechanism such as EXTERNAL (defined in [SASL]) from using client
 
1380   identity determined by the TLS negotiation.
 
1382   Once TLS has been started, the client MUST discard cached information
 
1383   about server capabilities and SHOULD reissue the CAPABILITY command.
 
1384   This is necessary to protect against active attacks that alter the
 
1385   capabilities list prior to STARTTLS.  The server MAY advertise
 
1386   different capabilities and, in particular, SHOULD NOT advertise the
 
1387   STARTTLS capability, after a successful STARTTLS command.
 
1392      S: * CAPABILITY IMAP4rev2 STARTTLS LOGINDISABLED
 
1393      S: a001 OK CAPABILITY completed
 
1395      S: a002 OK Begin TLS negotiation now
 
1396      <TLS negotiation, further commands are under TLS layer>
 
1398      S: * CAPABILITY IMAP4rev2 AUTH=PLAIN
 
1399      S: a003 OK CAPABILITY completed
 
1400      C: a004 AUTHENTICATE PLAIN dGVzdAB0ZXN0AHRlc3Q=
 
1401      S: a004 OK Success (tls protection)
 
1405   Arguments:    SASL authentication mechanism name
 
1409   Responses:    continuation data can be requested
 
1411   Result:       OK -  authenticate completed, now in authenticated
 
1413                 NO -  authenticate failure: unsupported authentication
 
1414                    mechanism, credentials rejected
 
1415                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid,
 
1416                    authentication exchange canceled
 
1418   The AUTHENTICATE command indicates a [SASL] authentication mechanism
 
1419   to the server.  If the server supports the requested authentication
 
1420   mechanism, it performs an authentication protocol exchange to
 
1421   authenticate and identify the client.  It MAY also negotiate an
 
1422   OPTIONAL security layer for subsequent protocol interactions.  If the
 
1423   requested authentication mechanism is not supported, the server
 
1424   SHOULD reject the AUTHENTICATE command by sending a tagged NO
 
1427   The AUTHENTICATE command supports the optional "initial response"
 
1428   feature defined in Section 4 of [SASL].  The client doesn't need to
 
1429   use it.  If a SASL mechanism supports "initial response", but it is
 
1430   not specified by the client, the server handles it as specified in
 
1431   Section 3 of [SASL].
 
1433   The service name specified by this protocol's profile of [SASL] is
 
1436   The authentication protocol exchange consists of a series of server
 
1437   challenges and client responses that are specific to the
 
1438   authentication mechanism.  A server challenge consists of a command
 
1439   continuation request response with the "+" token followed by a
 
1440   base64-encoded (see Section 4 of [RFC4648]) string.  The client
 
1441   response consists of a single line consisting of a base64-encoded
 
1443   it issues a line consisting of a single "*".  If the server receives
 
1444   such a response, or if it receives an invalid base64 string (e.g.,
 
1445   characters outside the base64 alphabet or non-terminal "="), it MUST
 
1446   reject the AUTHENTICATE command by sending a tagged BAD response.
 
1448   As with any other client response, the initial response MUST be
 
1449   encoded as base64.  It also MUST be transmitted outside of a quoted
 
1451   client MUST send a single pad character ("=").  This indicates that
 
1452   the response is present, but it is a zero-length string.
 
1454   When decoding the base64 data in the initial response, decoding
 
1455   errors MUST be treated as in any normal SASL client response, i.e.,
 
1456   with a tagged BAD response.  In particular, the server should check
 
1457   for any characters not explicitly allowed by the base64 alphabet, as
 
1458   well as any sequence of base64 characters that contains the pad
 
1459   character ('=') anywhere other than the end of the string (e.g.,
 
1460   "=AAA" and "AAA=BBB" are not allowed).
 
1463   does not support an initial response, the server MUST reject the
 
1464   command with a tagged BAD response.
 
1466   If a security layer is negotiated through the [SASL] authentication
 
1467   exchange, it takes effect immediately following the CRLF that
 
1468   concludes the authentication exchange for the client and the CRLF of
 
1469   the tagged OK response for the server.
 
1471   While client and server implementations MUST implement the
 
1472   AUTHENTICATE command itself, it is not required to implement any
 
1473   authentication mechanisms other than the PLAIN mechanism described in
 
1474   [PLAIN].  Also, an authentication mechanism is not required to
 
1475   support any security layers.
 
1477      Note: a server implementation MUST implement a configuration in
 
1478      which it does NOT permit any plaintext password mechanisms, unless
 
1479      the STARTTLS command has been negotiated, TLS has been negotiated
 
1480      on an Implicit TLS port, or some other mechanism that protects the
 
1481      session from password snooping has been provided.  Server sites
 
1482      SHOULD NOT use any configuration that permits a plaintext password
 
1483      mechanism without such a protection mechanism against password
 
1484      snooping.  Client and server implementations SHOULD implement
 
1485      additional [SASL] mechanisms that do not use plaintext passwords,
 
1486      such as the GSSAPI mechanism described in [RFC4752], the SCRAM-
 
1487      SHA-256/SCRAM-SHA-256-PLUS [SCRAM-SHA-256] mechanisms, and/or the
 
1488      EXTERNAL [SASL] mechanism for mutual TLS authentication.  (Note
 
1489      that the SASL framework allows for the creation of SASL mechanisms
 
1490      that support 2-factor authentication (2FA); however, none are
 
1491      fully ready to be recommended by this document.)
 
1493   Servers and clients can support multiple authentication mechanisms.
 
1494   The server SHOULD list its supported authentication mechanisms in the
 
1495   response to the CAPABILITY command so that the client knows which
 
1496   authentication mechanisms to use.
 
1498   A server MAY include a CAPABILITY response code in the tagged OK
 
1499   response of a successful AUTHENTICATE command in order to send
 
1500   capabilities automatically.  It is unnecessary for a client to send a
 
1501   separate CAPABILITY command if it recognizes these automatic
 
1502   capabilities.  This should only be done if a security layer was not
 
1503   negotiated by the AUTHENTICATE command, because the tagged OK
 
1504   response as part of an AUTHENTICATE command is not protected by
 
1505   encryption/integrity checking.  [SASL] requires the client to re-
 
1506   issue a CAPABILITY command in this case.  The server MAY advertise
 
1507   different capabilities after a successful AUTHENTICATE command.
 
1509   If an AUTHENTICATE command fails with a NO response, the client MAY
 
1510   try another authentication mechanism by issuing another AUTHENTICATE
 
1511   command.  It MAY also attempt to authenticate by using the LOGIN
 
1512   command (see Section 6.2.3 for more detail).  In other words, the
 
1513   client MAY request authentication types in decreasing order of
 
1514   preference, with the LOGIN command as a last resort.
 
1516   The authorization identity passed from the client to the server
 
1517   during the authentication exchange is interpreted by the server as
 
1518   the user name whose privileges the client is requesting.
 
1522     S: * OK [CAPABILITY IMAP4rev2 STARTTLS AUTH=GSSAPI]
 
1524     C: A001 AUTHENTICATE GSSAPI
 
1526     C: YIIB+wYJKoZIhvcSAQICAQBuggHqMIIB5qADAgEFoQMCAQ6iBw
 
1527        MFACAAAACjggEmYYIBIjCCAR6gAwIBBaESGxB1Lndhc2hpbmd0
 
1528        b24uZWR1oi0wK6ADAgEDoSQwIhsEaW1hcBsac2hpdmFtcy5jYW
 
1529        Mud2FzaGluZ3Rvbi5lZHWjgdMwgdCgAwIBAaEDAgEDooHDBIHA
 
1530        cS1GSa5b+fXnPZNmXB9SjL8Ollj2SKyb+3S0iXMljen/jNkpJX
 
1531        AleKTz6BQPzj8duz8EtoOuNfKgweViyn/9B9bccy1uuAE2HI0y
 
1532        C/PHXNNU9ZrBziJ8Lm0tTNc98kUpjXnHZhsMcz5Mx2GR6dGknb
 
1533        I0iaGcRerMUsWOuBmKKKRmVMMdR9T3EZdpqsBd7jZCNMWotjhi
 
1534        vd5zovQlFqQ2Wjc2+y46vKP/iXxWIuQJuDiisyXF0Y8+5GTpAL
 
1535        pHDc1/pIGmMIGjoAMCAQGigZsEgZg2on5mSuxoDHEA1w9bcW9n
 
1536        FdFxDKpdrQhVGVRDIzcCMCTzvUboqb5KjY1NJKJsfjRQiBYBdE
 
1537        NKfzK+g5DlV8nrw81uOcP8NOQCLR5XkoMHC0Dr/80ziQzbNqhx
 
1538        O6652Npft0LQwJvenwDI13YxpwOdMXzkWZN/XrEqOWp6GCgXTB
 
1539        vCyLWLlWnbaUkZdEYbKHBPjd8t/1x5Yg==
 
1540     S: + YGgGCSqGSIb3EgECAgIAb1kwV6ADAgEFoQMCAQ+iSzBJoAMC
 
1541        AQGiQgRAtHTEuOP2BXb9sBYFR4SJlDZxmg39IxmRBOhXRKdDA0
 
1542        uHTCOT9Bq3OsUTXUlk0CsFLoa8j+gvGDlgHuqzWHPSQg==
 
1544     S: + YDMGCSqGSIb3EgECAgIBAAD/////6jcyG4GE3KkTzBeBiVHe
 
1545        ceP2CWY0SR0fAQAgAAQEBAQ=
 
1546     C: YDMGCSqGSIb3EgECAgIBAAD/////3LQBHXTpFfZgrejpLlLImP
 
1547        wkhbfa2QteAQAgAG1yYwE=
 
1548     S: A001 OK GSSAPI authentication successful
 
1550   The following example demonstrates the use of an initial response.
 
1554     S: * OK [CAPABILITY IMAP4rev2 STARTTLS AUTH=GSSAPI
 
1555      LOGINDISABLED] Server ready
 
1557     S: A01 OK STARTTLS completed
 
1558     <TLS negotiation, further commands are under TLS layer>
 
1560     S: * CAPABILITY IMAP4rev2 AUTH=GSSAPI AUTH=PLAIN
 
1561     S: A02 OK CAPABILITY completed
 
1562     C: A03 AUTHENTICATE PLAIN dGVzdAB0ZXN0AHRlc3Q=
 
1563     S: A03 OK Success (tls protection)
 
1565   Note that because the initial response is optional, the following
 
1566   negotiation (which does not use the initial response) is still valid
 
1567   and MUST be supported by the server:
 
1569     ... client connects to server and negotiates a TLS
 
1570         protection layer ...
 
1572     S: * CAPABILITY IMAP4rev2 AUTH=PLAIN
 
1574     C: A01 AUTHENTICATE PLAIN
 
1576     C: dGVzdAB0ZXN0AHRlc3Q=
 
1577     S: A01 OK Success (tls protection)
 
1579   Note that in the above example there is a space following the "+"
 
1582   The following is an example authentication using the SASL EXTERNAL
 
1583   mechanism (defined in [SASL]) under a TLS protection layer and an
 
1584   empty initial response:
 
1586     ... client connects to server and negotiates a TLS
 
1587         protection layer ...
 
1589     S: * CAPABILITY IMAP4rev2 AUTH=PLAIN AUTH=EXTERNAL
 
1591     C: A01 AUTHENTICATE EXTERNAL =
 
1592     S: A01 OK Success (tls protection)
 
1594   Note: The line breaks within server challenges and client responses
 
1595   are for editorial clarity and are not in real authenticators.
 
1599   Arguments:    user name
 
1603   Responses:    no specific responses for this command
 
1605   Result:       OK -  login completed, now in authenticated state
 
1606                 NO -  login failure: user name or password rejected
 
1607                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
1609   The LOGIN command identifies the client to the server and carries the
 
1610   plaintext password authenticating this user.  The LOGIN command
 
1611   SHOULD NOT be used except as a last resort (after attempting and
 
1612   failing to authenticate using the AUTHENTICATE command one or more
 
1613   times), and it is recommended that client implementations have a
 
1614   means to disable any automatic use of the LOGIN command.
 
1616   A server MAY include a CAPABILITY response code in the tagged OK
 
1617   response to a successful LOGIN command in order to send capabilities
 
1618   automatically.  It is unnecessary for a client to send a separate
 
1619   CAPABILITY command if it recognizes these automatic capabilities.
 
1623     C: a001 LOGIN SMITH SESAME
 
1624     S: a001 OK LOGIN completed
 
1626   Note: Use of the LOGIN command over an insecure network (such as the
 
1627   Internet) is a security risk, because anyone monitoring network
 
1628   traffic can obtain plaintext passwords.  For that reason, clients
 
1629   MUST NOT use LOGIN on unsecure networks.
 
1631   Unless the client is accessing IMAP service on an Implicit TLS port
 
1632   [RFC8314], the STARTTLS command has been negotiated, or some other
 
1633   mechanism that protects the session from password snooping has been
 
1634   provided, a server implementation MUST implement a configuration in
 
1635   which it advertises the LOGINDISABLED capability and does NOT permit
 
1636   the LOGIN command.  Server sites SHOULD NOT use any configuration
 
1637   that permits the LOGIN command without such a protection mechanism
 
1638   against password snooping.  A client implementation MUST NOT send a
 
1639   LOGIN command if the LOGINDISABLED capability is advertised.
 
16416.3.  Client Commands - Authenticated State
 
1643   In the authenticated state, commands that manipulate mailboxes as
 
1644   atomic entities are permitted.  Of these commands, SELECT and EXAMINE
 
1645   will select a mailbox for access and enter the selected state.
 
1647   In addition to the universal commands (CAPABILITY, NOOP, and LOGOUT),
 
1648   the following commands are valid in the authenticated state: ENABLE,
 
1649   SELECT, EXAMINE, NAMESPACE, CREATE, DELETE, RENAME, SUBSCRIBE,
 
1650   UNSUBSCRIBE, LIST, STATUS, APPEND, and IDLE.
 
1654   Arguments:    capability names
 
1656   Responses:    no specific responses for this command
 
1658   Result:       OK -  Relevant capabilities enabled
 
1659                 BAD -  No arguments, or syntax error in an argument
 
1661   Several IMAP extensions allow the server to return unsolicited
 
1662   responses specific to these extensions in certain circumstances.
 
1663   However, servers cannot send those unsolicited responses (with the
 
1664   exception of response codes (see Section 7.1) included in tagged or
 
1665   untagged OK/NO/BAD responses, which can always be sent) until they
 
1666   know that the clients support such extensions and thus will be able
 
1667   to correctly parse and process the extension response data.
 
1669   The ENABLE command provides an explicit indication from the client
 
1670   that it supports particular extensions.  It is designed such that the
 
1671   client can send a simple constant string with the extensions it
 
1672   supports, and the server will enable the shared subset that both
 
1675   The ENABLE command takes a list of capability names and requests the
 
1676   server to enable the named extensions.  Once enabled using ENABLE,
 
1677   each extension remains active until the IMAP connection is closed.
 
1678   For each argument, the server does the following:
 
1680   *  If the argument is not an extension known to the server, the
 
1681      server MUST ignore the argument.
 
1683   *  If the argument is an extension known to the server, and it is not
 
1684      specifically permitted to be enabled using ENABLE, the server MUST
 
1685      ignore the argument.  (Note that knowing about an extension
 
1686      doesn't necessarily imply supporting that extension.)
 
1688   *  If the argument is an extension that is supported by the server
 
1689      and that needs to be enabled, the server MUST enable the extension
 
1690      for the duration of the connection.  Note that once an extension
 
1691      is enabled, there is no way to disable it.
 
1693   If the ENABLE command is successful, the server MUST send an untagged
 
1694   ENABLED response (Section 7.2.1), which includes all enabled
 
1695   extensions as specified above.  The ENABLED response is sent even if
 
1696   no extensions were enabled.
 
1698   Clients SHOULD only include extensions that need to be enabled by the
 
1699   server.  For example, a client can enable IMAP4rev2-specific behavior
 
1700   when both IMAP4rev1 and IMAP4rev2 are advertised in the CAPABILITY
 
1701   response.  Future RFCs may add to this list.
 
1703   The ENABLE command is only valid in the authenticated state, before
 
1704   any mailbox is selected.  Clients MUST NOT issue ENABLE once they
 
1705   SELECT/EXAMINE a mailbox; however, server implementations don't have
 
1706   to check that no mailbox is selected or was previously selected
 
1707   during the duration of a connection.
 
1709   The ENABLE command can be issued multiple times in a session.  It is
 
1710   additive; that is, "ENABLE a b", followed by "ENABLE c", is the same
 
1711   as a single command "ENABLE a b c".  When multiple ENABLE commands
 
1712   are issued, each corresponding ENABLED response SHOULD only contain
 
1713   extensions enabled by the corresponding ENABLE command, i.e., for the
 
1714   above example, the ENABLED response to "ENABLE c" should not contain
 
1717   There are no limitations on pipelining ENABLE.  For example, it is
 
1718   possible to send ENABLE and then immediately SELECT, or a LOGIN
 
1719   immediately followed by ENABLE.
 
1721   The server MUST NOT change the CAPABILITY list as a result of
 
1722   executing ENABLE; that is, a CAPABILITY command issued right after an
 
1723   ENABLE command MUST list the same capabilities as a CAPABILITY
 
1724   command issued before the ENABLE command.  This is demonstrated in
 
1725   the following example.  Note that below "X-GOOD-IDEA" is a fictitious
 
1726   extension capability that can be ENABLED.
 
1729     S: * CAPABILITY IMAP4rev2 ID LITERAL+ X-GOOD-IDEA
 
1731     C: t2 ENABLE CONDSTORE X-GOOD-IDEA
 
1732     S: * ENABLED X-GOOD-IDEA
 
1735     S: * CAPABILITY IMAP4rev2 ID LITERAL+ X-GOOD-IDEA
 
1738   In the following example, the client enables the Conditional Store
 
1739   (CONDSTORE) extension [RFC7162]:
 
1741     C: a1 ENABLE CONDSTORE
 
1742     S: * ENABLED CONDSTORE
 
1743     S: a1 OK Conditional Store enabled
 
17456.3.1.1.  Note to Designers of Extensions That May Use the ENABLE
 
1748   Designers of IMAP extensions are discouraged from creating extensions
 
1749   that require ENABLE unless there is no good alternative design.
 
1750   Specifically, extensions that cause potentially incompatible behavior
 
1751   changes to deployed server responses (and thus benefit from ENABLE)
 
1752   have a higher complexity cost than extensions that do not.
 
1756   Arguments:    mailbox name
 
1758   Responses:    REQUIRED untagged responses:  FLAGS, EXISTS, LIST
 
1759                 REQUIRED OK untagged responses:  PERMANENTFLAGS,
 
1760                    UIDNEXT, UIDVALIDITY
 
1762   Result:       OK -  select completed, now in selected state
 
1763                 NO -  select failure, now in authenticated state: no
 
1764                    such mailbox, can't access mailbox
 
1765                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
1767   The SELECT command selects a mailbox so that messages in the mailbox
 
1768   can be accessed.  Before returning an OK to the client, the server
 
1769   MUST send the following untagged data to the client.  (The order of
 
1770   individual responses is not important.)  Note that earlier versions
 
1771   of this protocol, such as the IMAP4rev1 version specified in
 
1772   [RFC2060], only required the FLAGS and EXISTS untagged responses and
 
1773   UIDVALIDITY response code.  Client implementations that need to
 
1774   remain compatible with such older IMAP versions have to implement
 
1775   default behavior for missing data, as discussed with the individual
 
1779      Defined flags in the mailbox.  See the description of the FLAGS
 
1780      response in Section 7.3.5 for more detail.
 
1783      The number of messages in the mailbox.  See the description of the
 
1784      EXISTS response in Section 7.4.1 for more detail.
 
1787      The server MUST return a LIST response with the mailbox name.  The
 
1788      list of mailbox attributes MUST be accurate.  If the server allows
 
1789      denormalized UTF-8 mailbox names (see Section 5.1) and the
 
1790      supplied mailbox name differs from the normalized version, the
 
1791      server MUST return LIST with the OLDNAME extended data item.  See
 
1792      Section 6.3.9.7 for more details.
 
1794   OK [PERMANENTFLAGS (<list of flags>)]
 
1795      A list of message flags that the client can change permanently.
 
1796      If this is missing, the client should assume that all flags can be
 
1797      changed permanently.
 
1800      The next unique identifier value.  Refer to Section 2.3.1.1 for
 
1803   OK [UIDVALIDITY <n>]
 
1804      The unique identifier validity value.  Refer to Section 2.3.1.1
 
1805      for more information.
 
1807   Only one mailbox can be selected at a time in a connection;
 
1808   simultaneous access to multiple mailboxes requires multiple
 
1810   currently selected mailbox before attempting the new selection.
 
1811   Consequently, if a mailbox is selected and a SELECT command that
 
1813   selected mailbox, the server MUST return an untagged OK response with
 
1814   the "[CLOSED]" response code when the currently selected mailbox is
 
1815   closed (see Section 7.1).
 
1817   If the client is permitted to modify the mailbox, the server SHOULD
 
1818   prefix the text of the tagged OK response with the "[READ-WRITE]"
 
1821   If the client is not permitted to modify the mailbox but is permitted
 
1822   read access, the mailbox is selected as read-only, and the server
 
1823   MUST prefix the text of the tagged OK response to SELECT with the
 
1824   "[READ-ONLY]" response code.  Read-only access through SELECT differs
 
1825   from the EXAMINE command in that certain read-only mailboxes MAY
 
1826   permit the change of permanent state on a per-user (as opposed to
 
1827   global) basis.  Netnews messages marked in a server-based .newsrc
 
1828   file are an example of such per-user permanent state that can be
 
1829   modified with read-only mailboxes.
 
1833     C: A142 SELECT INBOX
 
1835     S: * OK [UIDVALIDITY 3857529045] UIDs valid
 
1836     S: * OK [UIDNEXT 4392] Predicted next UID
 
1837     S: * FLAGS (\Answered \Flagged \Deleted \Seen \Draft)
 
1838     S: * OK [PERMANENTFLAGS (\Deleted \Seen \*)] Limited
 
1839     S: * LIST () "/" INBOX
 
1840     S: A142 OK [READ-WRITE] SELECT completed
 
1844     C: A142 SELECT INBOX
 
1846     S: * OK [UIDVALIDITY 3857529045] UIDs valid
 
1847     S: * OK [UIDNEXT 4392] Predicted next UID
 
1848     S: * FLAGS (\Answered \Flagged \Deleted \Seen \Draft)
 
1849     S: * OK [PERMANENTFLAGS (\Deleted \Seen \*)] Limited
 
1850     S: A142 OK [READ-WRITE] SELECT completed
 
1851     [...some time later...]
 
1852     C: A143 SELECT Drafts
 
1853     S: * OK [CLOSED] Previous mailbox is now closed
 
1855     S: * OK [UIDVALIDITY 9877410381] UIDs valid
 
1856     S: * OK [UIDNEXT 102] Predicted next UID
 
1857     S: * LIST () "/" Drafts
 
1858     S: * FLAGS (\Answered \Flagged \Deleted \Seen \Draft)
 
1859     S: * OK [PERMANENTFLAGS (\Deleted \Seen \Answered
 
1860         \Flagged \Draft \*)] System flags and keywords allowed
 
1861     S: A143 OK [READ-WRITE] SELECT completed
 
1863   Note that IMAP4rev1-compliant servers can also send the untagged
 
1864   RECENT response that was deprecated in IMAP4rev2, e.g., "* 0 RECENT".
 
1865   Pure IMAP4rev2 clients are advised to ignore the untagged RECENT
 
1870   Arguments:    mailbox name
 
1872   Responses:    REQUIRED untagged responses:  FLAGS, EXISTS, LIST
 
1873                 REQUIRED OK untagged responses:  PERMANENTFLAGS,
 
1874                    UIDNEXT, UIDVALIDITY
 
1876   Result:       OK -  examine completed, now in selected state
 
1877                 NO -  examine failure, now in authenticated state: no
 
1878                    such mailbox, can't access mailbox
 
1879                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
1881   The EXAMINE command is identical to SELECT and returns the same
 
1882   output; however, the selected mailbox is identified as read-only.  No
 
1883   changes to the permanent state of the mailbox, including per-user
 
1884   state, are permitted.
 
1886   The text of the tagged OK response to the EXAMINE command MUST begin
 
1887   with the "[READ-ONLY]" response code.
 
1891      C: A932 EXAMINE blurdybloop
 
1893      S: * OK [UIDVALIDITY 3857529045] UIDs valid
 
1894      S: * OK [UIDNEXT 4392] Predicted next UID
 
1895      S: * LIST () "/" blurdybloop
 
1896      S: * FLAGS (\Answered \Flagged \Deleted \Seen \Draft)
 
1897      S: * OK [PERMANENTFLAGS ()] No permanent flags permitted
 
1898      S: A932 OK [READ-ONLY] EXAMINE completed
 
1902   Arguments:    mailbox name
 
1904   Responses:    OPTIONAL untagged response:  LIST
 
1906   Result:       OK -  create completed
 
1907                 NO -  create failure: can't create mailbox with that
 
1909                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
1911   The CREATE command creates a mailbox with the given name.  An OK
 
1912   response is returned only if a new mailbox with that name has been
 
1915   return a tagged NO response.  If a client attempts to create a UTF-8
 
1916   mailbox name that is not a valid Net-Unicode name, the server MUST
 
1917   reject the creation or convert the name to Net-Unicode prior to
 
1918   creating the mailbox.  If the server decides to convert (normalize)
 
1919   the name, it SHOULD return an untagged LIST with an OLDNAME extended
 
1920   data item, with the OLDNAME value being the supplied mailbox name and
 
1921   the name parameter being the normalized mailbox name.  (See
 
1922   Section 6.3.9.7 for more details.)
 
1924   Mailboxes created in one IMAP session MAY be announced to other IMAP
 
1925   sessions using an unsolicited LIST response.  If the server
 
1926   automatically subscribes a mailbox when it is created, then the
 
1927   unsolicited LIST response for each affected subscribed mailbox name
 
1928   MUST include the \Subscribed attribute.
 
1931   character (as returned from the server by a LIST command), this is a
 
1932   declaration that the client intends to create mailbox names under
 
1933   this name in the hierarchy.  Server implementations that do not
 
1935   the name created is without the trailing hierarchy delimiter.
 
1938   the name, the server SHOULD create any superior hierarchical names
 
1939   that are needed for the CREATE command to be successfully completed.
 
1940   In other words, an attempt to create "foo/bar/zap" on a server in
 
1941   which "/" is the hierarchy separator character SHOULD create foo/ and
 
1942   foo/bar/ if they do not already exist.
 
1944   If a new mailbox is created with the same name as a mailbox that was
 
1945   deleted, its unique identifiers MUST be greater than any unique
 
1946   identifiers used in the previous incarnation of the mailbox unless
 
1947   the new incarnation has a different unique identifier validity value.
 
1948   See the description of the UID command in Section 6.4.9 for more
 
1953     C: A003 CREATE owatagusiam/
 
1954     S: A003 OK CREATE completed
 
1955     C: A004 CREATE owatagusiam/blurdybloop
 
1956     S: A004 OK CREATE completed
 
1957     C: A005 CREATE NonNormalized
 
1958     S: * LIST () "/" "Normalized" ("OLDNAME" ("NonNormalized"))
 
1959     S: A005 OK CREATE completed
 
1961   (In the last example, imagine that "NonNormalized" is a non-NFC
 
1962   normalized Unicode mailbox name and that "Normalized" is its NFC
 
1963   normalized version.)
 
1965      |  Note: The interpretation of this example depends on whether "/"
 
1966      |  was returned as the hierarchy separator from LIST.  If "/" is
 
1967      |  the hierarchy separator, a new level of hierarchy named
 
1968      |  "owatagusiam" with a member called "blurdybloop" is created.
 
1969      |  Otherwise, two mailboxes at the same hierarchy level are
 
1974   Arguments:    mailbox name
 
1976   Responses:    OPTIONAL untagged response:  LIST
 
1978   Result:       OK -  delete completed
 
1979                 NO -  delete failure: can't delete mailbox with that
 
1981                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
1983   The DELETE command permanently removes the mailbox with the given
 
1984   name.  A tagged OK response is returned only if the mailbox has been
 
1985   deleted.  It is an error to attempt to delete INBOX or a mailbox name
 
1986   that does not exist.
 
1988   The DELETE command MUST NOT remove inferior hierarchical names.  For
 
1989   example, if a mailbox "foo" has an inferior "foo.bar" (assuming "."
 
1990   is the hierarchy delimiter character), removing "foo" MUST NOT remove
 
1991   "foo.bar".  It is an error to attempt to delete a name that has
 
1992   inferior hierarchical names and also has the \Noselect mailbox name
 
1993   attribute (see the description of the LIST response (Section 7.3.1)
 
1996   It is permitted to delete a name that has inferior hierarchical names
 
1997   and does not have the \Noselect mailbox name attribute.  If the
 
1998   server implementation does not permit deleting the name while
 
1999   inferior hierarchical names exist, then it SHOULD disallow the DELETE
 
2001   include the HASCHILDREN response code.  Alternatively, the server MAY
 
2002   allow the DELETE command, but it sets the \Noselect mailbox name
 
2003   attribute for that name.
 
2005   If the server returns an OK response, all messages in that mailbox
 
2006   are removed by the DELETE command.
 
2008   The value of the highest-used unique identifier of the deleted
 
2009   mailbox MUST be preserved so that a new mailbox created with the same
 
2010   name will not reuse the identifiers of the former incarnation, unless
 
2011   the new incarnation has a different unique identifier validity value.
 
2012   See the description of the UID command in Section 6.4.9 for more
 
2015   If the server decides to convert (normalize) the mailbox name, it
 
2016   SHOULD return an untagged LIST with the "\NonExistent" attribute and
 
2017   OLDNAME extended data item, with the OLDNAME value being the supplied
 
2018   mailbox name and the name parameter being the normalized mailbox
 
2019   name.  (See Section 6.3.9.7 for more details.)
 
2021   Mailboxes deleted in one IMAP session MAY be announced to other IMAP
 
2022   sessions using an unsolicited LIST response, containing the
 
2023   "\NonExistent" attribute.
 
2028     S: * LIST () "/" blurdybloop
 
2029     S: * LIST (\Noselect) "/" foo
 
2030     S: * LIST () "/" foo/bar
 
2031     S: A682 OK LIST completed
 
2032     C: A683 DELETE blurdybloop
 
2033     S: A683 OK DELETE completed
 
2035     S: A684 NO Name "foo" has inferior hierarchical names
 
2036     C: A685 DELETE foo/bar
 
2037     S: A685 OK DELETE Completed
 
2039     S: * LIST (\Noselect) "/" foo
 
2040     S: A686 OK LIST completed
 
2042     S: A687 OK DELETE Completed
 
2047     S: * LIST () "." blurdybloop
 
2048     S: * LIST () "." foo
 
2049     S: * LIST () "." foo.bar
 
2050     S: A82 OK LIST completed
 
2051     C: A83 DELETE blurdybloop
 
2052     S: A83 OK DELETE completed
 
2054     S: A84 OK DELETE Completed
 
2056     S: * LIST () "." foo.bar
 
2057     S: A85 OK LIST completed
 
2059     S: * LIST (\Noselect) "." foo
 
2060     S: A86 OK LIST completed
 
2064   Arguments:    existing mailbox name
 
2068   Responses:    OPTIONAL untagged response:  LIST
 
2070   Result:       OK -  rename completed
 
2071                 NO -  rename failure: can't rename mailbox with that
 
2072                    name, can't rename to mailbox with that name
 
2073                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
2075   The RENAME command changes the name of a mailbox.  A tagged OK
 
2076   response is returned only if the mailbox has been renamed.  It is an
 
2077   error to attempt to rename from a mailbox name that does not exist or
 
2078   to a mailbox name that already exists.  Any error in renaming will
 
2079   return a tagged NO response.
 
2081   If the name has inferior hierarchical names, then the inferior
 
2082   hierarchical names MUST also be renamed.  For example, a rename of
 
2083   "foo" to "zap" will rename "foo/bar" (assuming "/" is the hierarchy
 
2084   delimiter character) to "zap/bar".
 
2086   If the server's hierarchy separator character appears in the new
 
2087   mailbox name, the server SHOULD create any superior hierarchical
 
2088   names that are needed for the RENAME command to complete
 
2089   successfully.  In other words, an attempt to rename "foo/bar/zap" to
 
2090   "baz/rag/zowie" on a server in which "/" is the hierarchy separator
 
2091   character in the corresponding namespace SHOULD create "baz/" and
 
2092   "baz/rag/" if they do not already exist.
 
2094   The value of the highest-used unique identifier of the old mailbox
 
2095   name MUST be preserved so that a new mailbox created with the same
 
2096   name will not reuse the identifiers of the former incarnation, unless
 
2097   the new incarnation has a different unique identifier validity value.
 
2098   See the description of the UID command in Section 6.4.9 for more
 
2102   response, and it has special behavior: It moves all messages in INBOX
 
2103   to a new mailbox with the given name, leaving INBOX empty.  If the
 
2104   server implementation supports inferior hierarchical names of INBOX,
 
2105   these are unaffected by a rename of INBOX.  (Note that some servers
 
2106   disallow renaming INBOX by returning a tagged NO response, so clients
 
2107   need to be able to handle the failure of such RENAME commands.)
 
2109   If the server allows creation of mailboxes with names that are not
 
2110   valid Net-Unicode names, the server normalizes both the existing
 
2111   mailbox name parameter and the new mailbox name parameter.  If the
 
2112   normalized version of any of these 2 parameters differs from the
 
2113   corresponding supplied version, the server SHOULD return an untagged
 
2114   LIST response with an OLDNAME extended data item, with the OLDNAME
 
2115   value being the supplied existing mailbox name and the name parameter
 
2116   being the normalized new mailbox name (see Section 6.3.9.7).  This
 
2117   would allow the client to correlate the supplied name with the
 
2120   Mailboxes renamed in one IMAP session MAY be announced to other IMAP
 
2121   sessions using an unsolicited LIST response with an OLDNAME extended
 
2124   In both of the above cases, if the server automatically subscribes a
 
2125   mailbox when it is renamed, then the unsolicited LIST response for
 
2126   each affected subscribed mailbox name MUST include the \Subscribed
 
2127   attribute.  No unsolicited LIST responses need to be sent for child
 
2128   mailboxes.  When INBOX is successfully renamed, it is assumed that a
 
2129   new INBOX is created.  No unsolicited LIST responses need to be sent
 
2130   for INBOX in this case.
 
2135     S: * LIST () "/" blurdybloop
 
2136     S: * LIST (\Noselect) "/" foo
 
2137     S: * LIST () "/" foo/bar
 
2138     S: A682 OK LIST completed
 
2139     C: A683 RENAME blurdybloop sarasoop
 
2140     S: A683 OK RENAME completed
 
2141     C: A684 RENAME foo zowie
 
2142     S: A684 OK RENAME Completed
 
2144     S: * LIST () "/" sarasoop
 
2145     S: * LIST (\Noselect) "/" zowie
 
2146     S: * LIST () "/" zowie/bar
 
2147     S: A685 OK LIST completed
 
2150     S: * LIST () "." INBOX
 
2151     S: * LIST () "." INBOX.bar
 
2152     S: Z432 OK LIST completed
 
2153     C: Z433 RENAME INBOX old-mail
 
2154     S: Z433 OK RENAME completed
 
2156     S: * LIST () "." INBOX
 
2157     S: * LIST () "." INBOX.bar
 
2158     S: * LIST () "." old-mail
 
2159     S: Z434 OK LIST completed
 
2161   Note that renaming a mailbox doesn't update subscription information
 
2162   on the original name.  To keep subscription information in sync, the
 
2163   following sequence of commands can be used:
 
2167     C: 1003 UNSUBSCRIBE X
 
2169   Note that the above sequence of commands doesn't account for updating
 
2170   the subscription for any child mailboxes of mailbox X.
 
2176   Responses:    no specific responses for this command
 
2178   Result:       OK -  subscribe completed
 
2179                 NO -  subscribe failure: can't subscribe to that name
 
2180                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
2182   The SUBSCRIBE command adds the specified mailbox name to the server's
 
2183   set of "active" or "subscribed" mailboxes as returned by the LIST
 
2184   (SUBSCRIBED) command.  This command returns a tagged OK response if
 
2185   the subscription is successful or if the mailbox is already
 
2188   A server MAY validate the mailbox argument to SUBSCRIBE to verify
 
2189   that it exists.  However, it SHOULD NOT unilaterally remove an
 
2190   existing mailbox name from the subscription list even if a mailbox by
 
2191   that name no longer exists.
 
2193      |  Note: This requirement is because a server site can choose to
 
2194      |  routinely remove a mailbox with a well-known name (e.g.,
 
2195      |  "system-alerts") after its contents expire, with the intention
 
2196      |  of recreating it when new contents are appropriate.
 
2200     C: A002 SUBSCRIBE #news.comp.mail.mime
 
2201     S: A002 OK SUBSCRIBE completed
 
2205   Arguments:    mailbox name
 
2207   Responses:    no specific responses for this command
 
2209   Result:       OK -  unsubscribe completed
 
2210                 NO -  unsubscribe failure: can't unsubscribe that name
 
2211                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
2213   The UNSUBSCRIBE command removes the specified mailbox name from the
 
2214   server's set of "active" or "subscribed" mailboxes as returned by the
 
2216   if the unsubscription is successful or if the mailbox is not
 
2221     C: A002 UNSUBSCRIBE #news.comp.mail.mime
 
2222     S: A002 OK UNSUBSCRIBE completed
 
2228                 mailbox name with possible wildcards
 
2230   Arguments (extended):
 
2231                 selection options (OPTIONAL)
 
2234                 return options (OPTIONAL)
 
2236   Responses:    untagged responses: LIST
 
2238   Result:       OK -  list completed
 
2239                 NO -  list failure: can't list that reference or
 
2241                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
2243   The LIST command returns a subset of mailbox names from the complete
 
2244   set of all mailbox names available to the client.  Zero or more
 
2245   untagged LIST responses are returned, containing the name attributes,
 
2246   hierarchy delimiter, name, and possible extension information; see
 
2247   the description of the LIST response (Section 7.3.1) for more detail.
 
2249   The LIST command SHOULD return its data quickly, without undue delay.
 
2250   For example, it should not go to excess trouble to calculate the
 
2251   \Marked or \Unmarked status or perform other processing; if each name
 
2252   requires 1 second of processing, then a list of 1200 names would take
 
2255   The extended LIST command, originally introduced in [RFC5258],
 
2256   provides capabilities beyond that of the original IMAP LIST command.
 
2257   The extended syntax is being used if one or more of the following
 
2260   1.  the first word after the command name begins with a parenthesis
 
2261       ("LIST selection options");
 
2263   2.  the second word after the command name begins with a parenthesis;
 
2266   3.  the LIST command has more than 2 parameters ("LIST return
 
2269   An empty ("" string) reference name argument indicates that the
 
2270   mailbox name is interpreted as by SELECT.  The returned mailbox names
 
2271   MUST match the supplied mailbox name pattern(s).  A non-empty
 
2272   reference name argument is the name of a mailbox or a level of
 
2273   mailbox hierarchy, and it indicates the context in which the mailbox
 
2274   name is interpreted.  Clients SHOULD use the empty reference
 
2278   is a special request to return the hierarchy delimiter and the root
 
2279   name of the name given in the reference.  The value returned as the
 
2280   root MAY be the empty string if the reference is non-rooted or is an
 
2281   empty string.  In all cases, a hierarchy delimiter (or NIL if there
 
2282   is no hierarchy) is returned.  This permits a client to get the
 
2283   hierarchy delimiter (or find out that the mailbox names are flat)
 
2284   even when no mailboxes by that name currently exist.
 
2287   strings are ignored.  There is no special meaning for empty mailbox
 
2288   names when the extended syntax is used.
 
2290   The reference and mailbox name arguments are interpreted into a
 
2291   canonical form that represents an unambiguous left-to-right
 
2292   hierarchy.  The returned mailbox names will be in the interpreted
 
2293   form, which we call a "canonical LIST pattern": the canonical pattern
 
2294   constructed internally by the server from the reference and mailbox
 
2297      Note: The interpretation of the reference argument is
 
2298      implementation defined.  It depends on whether the server
 
2299      implementation has a concept of the "current working directory"
 
2300      and leading "break out characters", which override the current
 
2303      For example, on a server that exports a UNIX or NT file system,
 
2304      the reference argument contains the current working directory, and
 
2305      the mailbox name argument contains the name as interpreted in the
 
2306      current working directory.
 
2308      If a server implementation has no concept of break out characters,
 
2309      the canonical form is normally the reference name appended with
 
2310      the mailbox name.  Note that if the server implements the
 
2311      namespace convention (Section 5.1.2.1), "#" is a break out
 
2312      character and must be treated as such.
 
2314      If the reference argument is not a level of mailbox hierarchy
 
2315      (that is, it is a \NoInferiors name), and/or the reference
 
2316      argument does not end with the hierarchy delimiter, it is
 
2317      interpreted as implementation dependent.  For example, a reference
 
2318      of "foo/bar" and mailbox name of "rag/baz" could be interpreted as
 
2319      "foo/bar/rag/baz", "foo/barrag/baz", or "foo/rag/baz".  A client
 
2320      SHOULD NOT use such a reference argument except at the explicit
 
2321      request of the user.  A hierarchical browser MUST NOT make any
 
2322      assumptions about server interpretation of the reference unless
 
2323      the reference is a level of mailbox hierarchy AND ends with the
 
2324      hierarchy delimiter.
 
2326   Any part of the reference argument that is included in the
 
2327   interpreted form SHOULD prefix the interpreted form.  It SHOULD also
 
2328   be in the same form as the reference name argument.  This rule
 
2329   permits the client to determine if the returned mailbox name is in
 
2330   the context of the reference argument or if something about the
 
2331   mailbox argument overrode the reference argument.  Without this rule,
 
2332   the client would have to have knowledge of the server's naming
 
2333   semantics including what characters are "breakouts" that override a
 
2336   Here are some examples of how references and mailbox names might be
 
2337   interpreted on a UNIX-based server:
 
2339            +==============+==============+===================+
 
2340            | Reference    | Mailbox Name | Interpretation    |
 
2341            +==============+==============+===================+
 
2342            | ~smith/Mail/ | foo.*        | ~smith/Mail/foo.* |
 
2343            +--------------+--------------+-------------------+
 
2344            | archive/     | %            | archive/%         |
 
2345            +--------------+--------------+-------------------+
 
2346            | #news.       | comp.mail.*  | #news.comp.mail.* |
 
2347            +--------------+--------------+-------------------+
 
2348            | ~smith/Mail/ | /usr/doc/foo | /usr/doc/foo      |
 
2349            +--------------+--------------+-------------------+
 
2350            | archive/     | ~fred/Mail/* | ~fred/Mail/*      |
 
2351            +--------------+--------------+-------------------+
 
2355   The first three examples above demonstrate interpretations in the
 
2356   context of the reference argument.  Note that "~smith/Mail" SHOULD
 
2357   NOT be transformed into something like "/u2/users/smith/Mail", or it
 
2358   would be impossible for the client to determine that the
 
2359   interpretation was in the context of the reference.
 
2362   at this position.  The character "%" is similar to "*", but it does
 
2363   not match a hierarchy delimiter.  If the "%" wildcard is the last
 
2364   character of a mailbox name argument, matching levels of hierarchy
 
2365   are also returned.  If these levels of hierarchy are not also
 
2366   selectable mailboxes, they are returned with the \Noselect mailbox
 
2367   name attribute (see the description of the LIST response
 
2368   (Section 7.3.1) for more details).
 
2370   Any syntactically valid pattern that is not accepted by a server for
 
2371   any reason MUST be silently ignored, i.e., it results in no LIST
 
2372   responses, and the LIST command still returns a tagged OK response.
 
2374   Selection options tell the server to limit the mailbox names that are
 
2375   selected by the LIST operation.  If selection options are used, the
 
2376   mailboxes returned are those that match both the list of canonical
 
2377   LIST patterns and the selection options.  Unless a particular
 
2378   selection option provides special rules, the selection options are
 
2379   cumulative: a mailbox that matches the mailbox patterns is selected
 
2380   only if it also matches all of the selection options.  (An example of
 
2381   a selection option with special rules is the RECURSIVEMATCH option.)
 
2383   Return options control what information is returned for each matched
 
2384   mailbox.  Return options MUST NOT cause the server to report
 
2385   information about additional mailbox names other than those that
 
2386   match the canonical LIST patterns and selection options.  If no
 
2387   return options are specified, the client is only expecting
 
2388   information about mailbox attributes.  The server MAY return other
 
2389   information about the matched mailboxes, and clients MUST be able to
 
2390   handle that situation.
 
2392   Initial selection options and return options are defined in the
 
2393   following subsections, and new ones will also be defined in
 
2394   extensions.  Initial options defined in this document MUST be
 
2395   supported.  Each non-initial option will be enabled by a capability
 
2396   string (one capability may enable multiple options), and a client
 
2397   MUST NOT send an option for which the server has not advertised
 
2400   once; however, if the client does this, the server MUST act as if it
 
2401   received the option only once.  The order in which options are
 
2402   specified by the client is not significant.
 
2404   In general, each selection option except RECURSIVEMATCH will have a
 
2405   corresponding return option with the same name.  The REMOTE selection
 
2406   option is an anomaly in this regard and does not have a corresponding
 
2407   return option.  That is because it expands, rather than restricts,
 
2408   the set of mailboxes that are returned.  Future extensions to this
 
2409   specification should keep this parallelism in mind and define a pair
 
2410   of corresponding selection and return options.
 
2412   Server implementations are permitted to "hide" otherwise accessible
 
2413   mailboxes from the wildcard characters, by preventing certain
 
2414   characters or names from matching a wildcard in certain situations.
 
2415   For example, a UNIX-based server might restrict the interpretation of
 
2416   "*" so that an initial "/" character does not match.
 
2418   The special name INBOX is included in the output from LIST, if INBOX
 
2419   is supported by this server for this user and if the uppercase string
 
2420   "INBOX" matches the interpreted reference and mailbox name arguments
 
2421   with wildcards as described above.  The criteria for omitting INBOX
 
2422   is whether SELECT INBOX will return a failure; it is not relevant
 
2423   whether the user's real INBOX resides on this or some other server.
 
24256.3.9.1.  LIST Selection Options
 
2427   The selection options defined in this specification are as follows:
 
2430      Causes the LIST command to list subscribed names rather than the
 
2431      existing mailboxes.  This will often be a subset of the actual
 
2432      mailboxes.  It's also possible for this list to contain the names
 
2433      of mailboxes that don't exist.  In any case, the list MUST include
 
2434      exactly those mailbox names that match the canonical list pattern
 
2435      and are subscribed to.
 
2437      This option defines a mailbox attribute, "\Subscribed", that
 
2438      indicates that a mailbox name is subscribed to.  The "\Subscribed"
 
2439      attribute MUST be supported and MUST be accurately computed when
 
2440      the SUBSCRIBED selection option is specified.
 
2442      Note that the SUBSCRIBED selection option implies the SUBSCRIBED
 
2443      return option (see below).
 
2446      Causes the LIST command to show remote mailboxes as well as local
 
2447      ones, as described in [RFC2193].  This option is intended to
 
2448      replace the RLIST command and, in conjunction with the SUBSCRIBED
 
2449      selection option, the RLSUB command.  Servers that don't support
 
2450      the concept of remote mailboxes can ignore this option.
 
2452      This option defines a mailbox attribute, "\Remote", that indicates
 
2453      that a mailbox is a remote mailbox.  The "\Remote" attribute MUST
 
2454      be accurately computed when the REMOTE option is specified.
 
2456      The REMOTE selection option has no interaction with other options.
 
2457      Its effect is to tell the server to apply the other options, if
 
2458      any, to remote mailboxes, in addition to local ones.  In
 
2459      particular, it has no interaction with RECURSIVEMATCH (see below).
 
2460      A request for (REMOTE RECURSIVEMATCH) is invalid, because a
 
2461      request for (RECURSIVEMATCH) is also invalid.  A request for
 
2462      (REMOTE RECURSIVEMATCH SUBSCRIBED) is asking for all subscribed
 
2463      mailboxes, both local and remote.
 
2466      Forces the server to return information about parent mailboxes
 
2467      that don't match other selection options but have some
 
2468      submailboxes that do.  Information about children is returned in
 
2469      the CHILDINFO extended data item, as described in Section 6.3.9.6.
 
2471      Note 1:  In order for a parent mailbox to be returned, it still
 
2472         has to match the canonical LIST pattern.
 
2474      Note 2:  When returning the CHILDINFO extended data item, it
 
2475         doesn't matter whether or not the submailbox matches the
 
2476         canonical LIST pattern.  See also Example 9 in Section 6.3.9.8.
 
2478      The RECURSIVEMATCH option MUST NOT occur as the only selection
 
2479      option (or only with REMOTE), as it only makes sense when other
 
2480      selection options are also used.  The server MUST return a BAD
 
2481      tagged response in such case.
 
2483      Note that even if the RECURSIVEMATCH option is specified, the
 
2484      client MUST still be able to handle cases when a CHILDINFO
 
2485      extended data item is returned and there are no submailboxes that
 
2486      meet the selection criteria of the subsequent LIST command, as
 
2487      they can be deleted/renamed after the LIST response was sent but
 
2488      before the client had a chance to access them.
 
24906.3.9.2.  LIST Return Options
 
2492   The return options defined in this specification are as follows:
 
2495      Causes the LIST command to return subscription state for all
 
2496      matching mailbox names.  The "\Subscribed" attribute MUST be
 
2497      supported and MUST be accurately computed when the SUBSCRIBED
 
2498      return option is specified.  Furthermore, all other mailbox
 
2499      attributes MUST be accurately computed (this differs from the
 
2500      behavior of the obsolete LSUB command from [RFC3501]).  Note that
 
2501      the above requirements don't override the requirement for the LIST
 
2502      command to return results quickly (see Section 6.3.9), i.e.,
 
2503      server implementations need to compute results quickly and
 
2504      accurately.  For example, server implementors might need to create
 
2505      quick access indices.
 
2508      Requests mailbox child information as originally proposed in
 
2509      [RFC3348].  See Section 6.3.9.5, below, for details.
 
2512      Requests STATUS response for each matching mailbox.
 
2514      This option takes STATUS data items as parameters.  For each
 
2515      selectable mailbox matching the list pattern and selection
 
2516      options, the server MUST return an untagged LIST response followed
 
2517      by an untagged STATUS response containing the information
 
2518      requested in the STATUS return option, except for some cases
 
2521      If an attempted STATUS for a listed mailbox fails because the
 
2522      mailbox can't be selected (e.g., if the "l" Access Control List
 
2523      (ACL) right [RFC4314] is granted to the mailbox and the "r" right
 
2524      is not granted, or is due to a race condition between LIST and
 
2525      STATUS changing the mailbox to \NoSelect), the STATUS response
 
2526      MUST NOT be returned, and the LIST response MUST include the
 
2527      \NoSelect attribute.  This means the server may have to buffer the
 
2528      LIST reply until it has successfully looked up the necessary
 
2531      If the server runs into unexpected problems while trying to look
 
2532      up the STATUS information, it MAY drop the corresponding STATUS
 
2533      reply.  In such a situation, the LIST command would still return a
 
2536      See the note in the discussion of the STATUS command in
 
2537      Section 6.3.11 for information about obtaining status on the
 
2538      currently selected mailbox.
 
25406.3.9.3.  General Principles for Returning LIST Responses
 
2542   This section outlines several principles that can be used by server
 
2543   implementations of this document to decide whether a LIST response
 
2544   should be returned, as well as how many responses and what kind of
 
2545   information they may contain.
 
2547   1.  At most, one LIST response should be returned for each mailbox
 
2548       name that matches the canonical LIST pattern.  Server
 
2549       implementors must not assume that clients will be able to
 
2550       assemble mailbox attributes and other information returned in
 
2551       multiple LIST responses.
 
2553   2.  There are only two reasons for including a matching mailbox name
 
2554       in the responses to the LIST command (note that the server is
 
2555       allowed to return unsolicited responses at any time, and such
 
2556       responses are not governed by this rule):
 
2558       A.  The mailbox name also satisfies the selection criteria.
 
2560       B.  The mailbox name doesn't satisfy the selection criteria, but
 
2561           it has at least one descendant mailbox name that satisfies
 
2562           the selection criteria and that doesn't match the canonical
 
2565           For more information on this case, see the CHILDINFO extended
 
2566           data item described in Section 6.3.9.6.  Note that the
 
2567           CHILDINFO extended data item can only be returned when the
 
2568           RECURSIVEMATCH selection option is specified.
 
2570   3.  Attributes returned in the same LIST response are treated
 
2571       additively.  For example, the following response
 
2573        S: * LIST (\Subscribed \NonExistent) "/" "Fruit/Peach"
 
2575       means that the "Fruit/Peach" mailbox doesn't exist, but it is
 
25786.3.9.4.  Additional LIST-Related Requirements on Clients
 
2580   All clients MUST treat a LIST attribute with a stronger meaning as
 
2581   implying any attribute that can be inferred from it.  (See
 
2582   Section 7.3.1 for the list of currently defined attributes.)  For
 
2583   example, the client must treat the presence of the \NoInferiors
 
2584   attribute as if the \HasNoChildren attribute was also sent by the
 
2587   The following table summarizes inference rules.
 
2589                +====================+===================+
 
2590                | returned attribute | implied attribute |
 
2591                +====================+===================+
 
2592                |    \NoInferiors    |   \HasNoChildren  |
 
2593                +--------------------+-------------------+
 
2594                |    \NonExistent    |     \NoSelect     |
 
2595                +--------------------+-------------------+
 
25996.3.9.5.  The CHILDREN Return Option
 
2601   The CHILDREN return option is simply an indication that the client
 
2602   wants information about whether or not mailboxes contain child
 
2603   mailboxes; a server MAY provide it even if the option is not
 
2606   Many IMAP clients present the user with a hierarchical view of the
 
2607   mailboxes that a user has access to.  Rather than initially
 
2608   presenting the entire mailbox hierarchy to the user, it is often
 
2609   preferable to show the user a collapsed outline list of the mailbox
 
2610   hierarchy (particularly if there is a large number of mailboxes).
 
2611   The user can then expand the collapsed outline hierarchy as needed.
 
2612   It is common to include a visual clue (such as a ''+'') within the
 
2613   collapsed hierarchy to indicate that there are child mailboxes under
 
2614   a particular mailbox.  When the visual clue is clicked, the hierarchy
 
2615   list is expanded to show the child mailboxes.  The CHILDREN return
 
2616   option provides a mechanism for a client to efficiently determine
 
2617   whether a particular mailbox has children, without issuing a LIST ""
 
2618   * or a LIST "" % for each mailbox name.  The CHILDREN return option
 
2619   defines two new attributes that MUST be returned within a LIST
 
2620   response: \HasChildren and \HasNoChildren.  Although these attributes
 
2621   MAY be returned in response to any LIST command, the CHILDREN return
 
2622   option is provided to indicate that the client particularly wants
 
2623   this information.  If the CHILDREN return option is present, the
 
2624   server MUST return these attributes even if their computation is
 
2628        The presence of this attribute indicates that the mailbox has
 
2629        child mailboxes.  A server SHOULD NOT set this attribute if
 
2630        there are child mailboxes and the user does not have permission
 
2631        to access any of them.  In this case, \HasNoChildren SHOULD be
 
2632        used.  In many cases, however, a server may not be able to
 
2633        efficiently compute whether a user has access to any child
 
2634        mailbox.  Note that even though the \HasChildren attribute for a
 
2635        mailbox must be correct at the time of processing the mailbox, a
 
2636        client must be prepared to deal with a situation when a mailbox
 
2637        is marked with the \HasChildren attribute, but no child mailbox
 
2638        appears in the response to the LIST command.  This might happen,
 
2639        for example, due to child mailboxes being deleted or made
 
2640        inaccessible to the user (using access control) by another
 
2641        client before the server is able to list them.
 
2644        The presence of this attribute indicates that the mailbox has NO
 
2645        child mailboxes that are accessible to the currently
 
2648   It is an error for the server to return both a \HasChildren and a
 
2649   \HasNoChildren attribute in the same LIST response.
 
2651   Note: the \HasNoChildren attribute should not be confused with the
 
2652   \NoInferiors attribute, which indicates that no child mailboxes exist
 
2653   now and none can be created in the future.
 
26556.3.9.6.  CHILDINFO Extended Data Item
 
2657   The CHILDINFO extended data item MUST NOT be returned unless the
 
2658   client has specified the RECURSIVEMATCH selection option.
 
2660   The CHILDINFO extended data item in a LIST response describes the
 
2661   selection criteria that has caused it to be returned and indicates
 
2662   that the mailbox has at least one descendant mailbox that matches the
 
2665   Note: Some servers allow for mailboxes to exist without requiring
 
2666   their parent to exist.  For example, the mailbox "Customers/ABC" can
 
2667   exist while the mailbox "Customers" does not.  As the CHILDINFO
 
2668   extended data item is not allowed if the RECURSIVEMATCH selection
 
2669   option is not specified, such servers SHOULD use the "\NonExistent
 
2670   \HasChildren" attribute pair to signal to the client that there is a
 
2671   descendant mailbox that matches the selection criteria.  See Example
 
2672   11 in Section 6.3.9.8.
 
2674   The returned selection criteria allows the client to distinguish a
 
2675   solicited response from an unsolicited one, as well as to distinguish
 
2676   among solicited responses caused by multiple pipelined LIST commands
 
2677   that specify different criteria.
 
2679   Servers SHOULD only return a non-matching mailbox name along with
 
2680   CHILDINFO if at least one matching child is not also being returned.
 
2681   That is, servers SHOULD suppress redundant CHILDINFO responses.
 
2683   Examples 8 and 10 in Section 6.3.9.8 demonstrate the difference
 
2684   between the present CHILDINFO extended data item and the
 
2685   "\HasChildren" attribute.
 
2687   The following table summarizes interaction between the "\NonExistent"
 
2688   attribute and CHILDINFO (the first column indicates whether the
 
2689   parent mailbox exists):
 
2691     +========+===========+====================+=====================+
 
2692     | Exists | Meets the |  Has a child that  | Returned IMAP4rev2/ |
 
2693     |        | selection |     meets the      |    LIST-EXTENDED    |
 
2694     |        |  criteria | selection criteria |    attributes and   |
 
2696     +========+===========+====================+=====================+
 
2697     |   no   |     no    |         no         |   no LIST response  |
 
2699     +--------+-----------+--------------------+---------------------+
 
2700     |  yes   |     no    |         no         |   no LIST response  |
 
2702     +--------+-----------+--------------------+---------------------+
 
2703     |   no   |    yes    |         no         |    (\NonExistent    |
 
2705     +--------+-----------+--------------------+---------------------+
 
2706     |  yes   |    yes    |         no         |       (<attr>)      |
 
2707     +--------+-----------+--------------------+---------------------+
 
2708     |   no   |     no    |        yes         |   (\NonExistent) +  |
 
2710     +--------+-----------+--------------------+---------------------+
 
2711     |  yes   |     no    |        yes         |    () + CHILDINFO   |
 
2712     +--------+-----------+--------------------+---------------------+
 
2713     |   no   |    yes    |        yes         |    (\NonExistent    |
 
2714     |        |           |                    | <attr>) + CHILDINFO |
 
2715     +--------+-----------+--------------------+---------------------+
 
2716     |  yes   |    yes    |        yes         |      (<attr>) +     |
 
2718     +--------+-----------+--------------------+---------------------+
 
2722   where <attr> is one or more attributes that correspond to the
 
2723   selection criteria; for example, for the SUBSCRIBED option, the
 
2724   <attr> is \Subscribed.
 
2728   The OLDNAME extended data item is included when a mailbox name is
 
2729   created (with the CREATE command), renamed (with the RENAME command),
 
2730   or deleted (with the DELETE command).  (When a mailbox is deleted,
 
2731   the "\NonExistent" attribute is also included.)  IMAP extensions can
 
2732   specify other conditions when the OLDNAME extended data item should
 
2735   If the server allows denormalized mailbox names (see Section 5.1) in
 
2736   SELECT/EXAMINE, CREATE, RENAME, or DELETE, it SHOULD return an
 
2737   unsolicited LIST response that includes the OLDNAME extended data
 
2738   item, whenever the supplied mailbox name differs from the resulting
 
2739   normalized mailbox name.  From the client point of view, this is
 
2740   indistinguishable from another user renaming or deleting the mailbox,
 
2741   as specified in the previous paragraph.
 
2743   A deleted mailbox can be announced as follows:
 
2745     S: * LIST (\NonExistent) "." "INBOX.DeletedMailbox"
 
2747   Example of a renamed mailbox:
 
2749     S: * LIST () "/" "NewMailbox" ("OLDNAME" ("OldMailbox"))
 
27516.3.9.8.  LIST Command Examples
 
2753   This example shows some uses of the basic LIST command:
 
2758     S: * LIST (\Noselect) "/" ""
 
2759     S: A101 OK LIST Completed
 
2760     C: A102 LIST #news.comp.mail.misc ""
 
2761     S: * LIST (\Noselect) "." #news.
 
2762     S: A102 OK LIST Completed
 
2763     C: A103 LIST /usr/staff/jones ""
 
2764     S: * LIST (\Noselect) "/" /
 
2765     S: A103 OK LIST Completed
 
2766     C: A202 LIST ~/Mail/ %
 
2767     S: * LIST (\Noselect) "/" ~/Mail/foo
 
2768     S: * LIST () "/" ~/Mail/meetings
 
2769     S: A202 OK LIST completed
 
2773   1:   The first example shows the complete local hierarchy that will
 
2774        be used for the other examples.
 
2777        S: * LIST (\Marked \NoInferiors) "/" "inbox"
 
2778        S: * LIST () "/" "Fruit"
 
2779        S: * LIST () "/" "Fruit/Apple"
 
2780        S: * LIST () "/" "Fruit/Banana"
 
2781        S: * LIST () "/" "Tofu"
 
2782        S: * LIST () "/" "Vegetable"
 
2783        S: * LIST () "/" "Vegetable/Broccoli"
 
2784        S: * LIST () "/" "Vegetable/Corn"
 
2787   2:   In the next example, we will see the subscribed mailboxes.  This
 
2788        is similar to, but not equivalent with, the now deprecated <LSUB
 
2789        "" "*"> (see [RFC3501] for more details on the LSUB command).
 
2790        Note that the mailbox called "Fruit/Peach" is subscribed to, but
 
2791        it does not actually exist (perhaps it was deleted while still
 
2792        subscribed).  The "Fruit" mailbox is not subscribed to, but it
 
2793        has two subscribed children.  The "Vegetable" mailbox is
 
2794        subscribed and has two children; one of them is subscribed as
 
2797        C: A02 LIST (SUBSCRIBED) "" "*"
 
2798        S: * LIST (\Marked \NoInferiors \Subscribed) "/" "inbox"
 
2799        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "Fruit/Banana"
 
2800        S: * LIST (\Subscribed \NonExistent) "/" "Fruit/Peach"
 
2801        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "Vegetable"
 
2802        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "Vegetable/Broccoli"
 
2805   3:   The next example shows the use of the CHILDREN option.  The
 
2806        client, without having to list the second level of hierarchy,
 
2807        now knows which of the top-level mailboxes have submailboxes
 
2808        (children) and which do not.  Note that it's not necessary for
 
2809        the server to return the \HasNoChildren attribute for the inbox,
 
2810        because the \NoInferiors attribute already implies that and has
 
2813        C: A03 LIST () "" "%" RETURN (CHILDREN)
 
2814        S: * LIST (\Marked \NoInferiors) "/" "inbox"
 
2815        S: * LIST (\HasChildren) "/" "Fruit"
 
2816        S: * LIST (\HasNoChildren) "/" "Tofu"
 
2817        S: * LIST (\HasChildren) "/" "Vegetable"
 
2820   4:   In this example, we see more mailboxes that reside on another
 
2821        server.  This is similar to the command <RLIST "" "%">.
 
2823        C: A04 LIST (REMOTE) "" "%" RETURN (CHILDREN)
 
2824        S: * LIST (\Marked \NoInferiors) "/" "inbox"
 
2825        S: * LIST (\HasChildren) "/" "Fruit"
 
2826        S: * LIST (\HasNoChildren) "/" "Tofu"
 
2827        S: * LIST (\HasChildren) "/" "Vegetable"
 
2828        S: * LIST (\Remote \HasNoChildren) "/" "Bread"
 
2829        S: * LIST (\HasChildren \Remote) "/" "Meat"
 
2832   5:   The following example also requests the server to include
 
2833        mailboxes that reside on another server.  The server returns
 
2834        information about all mailboxes that are subscribed.  This is
 
2835        similar to the command <RLSUB "" "*"> (see [RFC2193] for more
 
2836        details on RLSUB).  We also see the use of two selection
 
2839        C: A05 LIST (REMOTE SUBSCRIBED) "" "*"
 
2840        S: * LIST (\Marked \NoInferiors \Subscribed) "/" "inbox"
 
2841        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "Fruit/Banana"
 
2842        S: * LIST (\Subscribed \NonExistent) "/" "Fruit/Peach"
 
2843        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "Vegetable"
 
2844        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "Vegetable/Broccoli"
 
2845        S: * LIST (\Remote \Subscribed) "/" "Bread"
 
2848   6:   The following example requests the server to include mailboxes
 
2849        that reside on another server.  The server is asked to return
 
2850        subscription information for all returned mailboxes.  This is
 
2851        different from the example above.
 
2853        Note that the output of this command is not a superset of the
 
2854        output in the previous example, as it doesn't include a LIST
 
2855        response for the non-existent "Fruit/Peach".
 
2857        C: A06 LIST (REMOTE) "" "*" RETURN (SUBSCRIBED)
 
2858        S: * LIST (\Marked \NoInferiors \Subscribed) "/" "inbox"
 
2859        S: * LIST () "/" "Fruit"
 
2860        S: * LIST () "/" "Fruit/Apple"
 
2861        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "Fruit/Banana"
 
2862        S: * LIST () "/" "Tofu"
 
2863        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "Vegetable"
 
2864        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "Vegetable/Broccoli"
 
2865        S: * LIST () "/" "Vegetable/Corn"
 
2866        S: * LIST (\Remote \Subscribed) "/" "Bread"
 
2867        S: * LIST (\Remote) "/" "Meat"
 
2870   7:   The following example demonstrates the difference between the
 
2871        \HasChildren attribute and the CHILDINFO extended data item.
 
2873        Let's assume there is the following hierarchy:
 
2876        S: * LIST (\Marked \NoInferiors) "/" "inbox"
 
2877        S: * LIST () "/" "Foo"
 
2878        S: * LIST () "/" "Foo/Bar"
 
2879        S: * LIST () "/" "Foo/Baz"
 
2880        S: * LIST () "/" "Moo"
 
2883        If the client asks RETURN (CHILDREN), it will get this:
 
2885        C: CA3 LIST "" "%" RETURN (CHILDREN)
 
2886        S: * LIST (\Marked \NoInferiors) "/" "inbox"
 
2887        S: * LIST (\HasChildren) "/" "Foo"
 
2888        S: * LIST (\HasNoChildren) "/" "Moo"
 
2891        A)  Let's also assume that the mailbox "Foo/Baz" is the only
 
2892            subscribed mailbox.  Then we get this result:
 
2894             C: C02 LIST (SUBSCRIBED) "" "*"
 
2895             S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "Foo/Baz"
 
2898            Now, if the client issues <LIST (SUBSCRIBED) "" "%">, the
 
2899            server will return no mailboxes (as the mailboxes "Moo",
 
2900            "Foo", and "Inbox" are NOT subscribed).  However, if the
 
2903             C: C04 LIST (SUBSCRIBED RECURSIVEMATCH) "" "%"
 
2904             S: * LIST () "/" "Foo" ("CHILDINFO" ("SUBSCRIBED"))
 
2907            (that is, the mailbox "Foo" is not subscribed, but it has a
 
2908            child that is), then A1 or A2 occurs.
 
2910            A1)  If the mailbox "Foo" had also been subscribed, the last
 
2911                 command would return this:
 
2913                 C: C04 LIST (SUBSCRIBED RECURSIVEMATCH) "" "%"
 
2914                 S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "Foo" ("CHILDINFO"
 
2920                 C: C04 LIST (SUBSCRIBED RECURSIVEMATCH) "" "%"
 
2921                 S: * LIST (\Subscribed \HasChildren) "/" "Foo"
 
2922                     ("CHILDINFO" ("SUBSCRIBED"))
 
2925            A2)  If we assume instead that the mailbox "Foo" is not part
 
2926                 of the original hierarchy and is not subscribed, the
 
2927                 last command will give this result:
 
2929                 C: C04 LIST (SUBSCRIBED RECURSIVEMATCH) "" "%"
 
2930                 S: * LIST (\NonExistent) "/" "Foo" ("CHILDINFO"
 
2934        B)  Now, let's assume that no mailbox is subscribed.  In this
 
2935            case, the command <LIST (SUBSCRIBED RECURSIVEMATCH) "" "%">
 
2936            will return no responses, as there are no subscribed
 
2937            children (even though "Foo" has children).
 
2939        C)  And finally, suppose that only the mailboxes "Foo" and "Moo"
 
2940            are subscribed.  In that case, we see this result:
 
2942             C: C04 LIST (SUBSCRIBED RECURSIVEMATCH) "" "%" RETURN
 
2944             S: * LIST (\HasChildren \Subscribed) "/" "Foo"
 
2945             S: * LIST (\HasNoChildren \Subscribed) "/" "Moo"
 
2948            (which means that the mailbox "Foo" has children, but none
 
2949            of them is subscribed).
 
2951   8:   The following example demonstrates that the CHILDINFO extended
 
2952        data item is returned whether or not child mailboxes match the
 
2953        canonical LIST pattern.
 
2955        Let's assume there is the following hierarchy:
 
2958        S: * LIST (\Marked \NoInferiors) "/" "inbox"
 
2959        S: * LIST () "/" "foo2"
 
2960        S: * LIST () "/" "foo2/bar1"
 
2961        S: * LIST () "/" "foo2/bar2"
 
2962        S: * LIST () "/" "baz2"
 
2963        S: * LIST () "/" "baz2/bar2"
 
2964        S: * LIST () "/" "baz2/bar22"
 
2965        S: * LIST () "/" "baz2/bar222"
 
2966        S: * LIST () "/" "eps2"
 
2967        S: * LIST () "/" "eps2/mamba"
 
2968        S: * LIST () "/" "qux2/bar2"
 
2971        And that the following mailboxes are subscribed:
 
2973        C: D02 LIST (SUBSCRIBED) "" "*"
 
2974        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "foo2/bar1"
 
2975        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "foo2/bar2"
 
2976        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "baz2/bar2"
 
2977        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "baz2/bar22"
 
2978        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "baz2/bar222"
 
2979        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "eps2"
 
2980        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "eps2/mamba"
 
2981        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "qux2/bar2"
 
2984        The client issues the following command first:
 
2986        C: D03 LIST (RECURSIVEMATCH SUBSCRIBED) "" "*2"
 
2987        S: * LIST () "/" "foo2" ("CHILDINFO" ("SUBSCRIBED"))
 
2988        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "foo2/bar2"
 
2989        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "baz2/bar2"
 
2990        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "baz2/bar22"
 
2991        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "baz2/bar222"
 
2992        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "eps2" ("CHILDINFO" ("SUBSCRIBED"))
 
2993        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "qux2/bar2"
 
2996        and the server may also include the following (but this would
 
2997        violate a restriction in Section 6.3.9.6, because CHILDINFO is
 
3000        S: * LIST () "/" "baz2" ("CHILDINFO" ("SUBSCRIBED"))
 
3001        S: * LIST (\NonExistent) "/" "qux2" ("CHILDINFO" ("SUBSCRIBED"))
 
3003        The CHILDINFO extended data item is returned for mailboxes
 
3004        "foo2", "baz2", and "eps2" because all of them have subscribed
 
3005        children, even though for the mailbox "foo2", only one of the
 
3006        two subscribed children matches the pattern; for the mailbox
 
3007        "baz2", all of the subscribed children match the pattern; and
 
3008        for the mailbox "eps2", none of the subscribed children match
 
3011        Note that if the client issues the following:
 
3013        C: D03 LIST (RECURSIVEMATCH SUBSCRIBED) "" "*"
 
3014        S: * LIST () "/" "foo2" ("CHILDINFO" ("SUBSCRIBED"))
 
3015        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "foo2/bar1"
 
3016        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "foo2/bar2"
 
3017        S: * LIST () "/" "baz2" ("CHILDINFO" ("SUBSCRIBED"))
 
3018        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "baz2/bar2"
 
3019        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "baz2/bar22"
 
3020        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "baz2/bar222"
 
3021        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "eps2" ("CHILDINFO" ("SUBSCRIBED"))
 
3022        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "eps2/mamba"
 
3023        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "/" "qux2/bar2"
 
3026        the LIST responses for mailboxes "foo2", "baz2", and "eps2"
 
3027        still have the CHILDINFO extended data item, even though this
 
3028        information is redundant and the client can determine it by
 
3031   9:   The following example shows usage of an extended syntax for the
 
3032        mailbox pattern.  It also demonstrates that the presence of the
 
3033        CHILDINFO extended data item doesn't necessarily imply
 
3036        C: a1 LIST "" ("foo")
 
3037        S: * LIST () "/" foo
 
3040        C: a2 LIST (SUBSCRIBED) "" "foo/*"
 
3041        S: * LIST (\Subscribed \NonExistent) "/" foo/bar
 
3044        C: a3 LIST (SUBSCRIBED RECURSIVEMATCH) "" foo RETURN (CHILDREN)
 
3045        S: * LIST (\HasNoChildren) "/" foo ("CHILDINFO" ("SUBSCRIBED"))
 
3048   10:  The following example shows how a server that supports missing
 
3049        mailbox hierarchy elements can signal to a client that didn't
 
3050        specify the RECURSIVEMATCH selection option that there is a
 
3051        child mailbox that matches the selection criteria.
 
3053        C: a1 LIST (REMOTE) "" *
 
3054        S: * LIST () "/" music/rock
 
3055        S: * LIST (\Remote) "/" also/jazz
 
3059        S: * LIST (\NonExistent \HasChildren) "/" music
 
3062        C: a3 LIST (REMOTE) "" %
 
3063        S: * LIST (\NonExistent \HasChildren) "/" music
 
3064        S: * LIST (\NonExistent \HasChildren) "/" also
 
3067        C: a3.1 LIST "" (% music/rock)
 
3068        S: * LIST () "/" music/rock
 
3071        Because "music/rock" is the only mailbox under "music", there's
 
3072        no need for the server to also return "music".  However, clients
 
3073        must handle both cases.
 
3075   11:  The following examples show use of the STATUS return option.
 
3077        C: A01 LIST "" % RETURN (STATUS (MESSAGES UNSEEN))
 
3078        S: * LIST () "."  "INBOX"
 
3079        S: * STATUS "INBOX" (MESSAGES 17 UNSEEN 16)
 
3080        S: * LIST () "." "foo"
 
3081        S: * STATUS "foo" (MESSAGES 30 UNSEEN 29)
 
3082        S: * LIST (\NoSelect) "." "bar"
 
3083        S: A01 OK List completed.
 
3085        The "bar" mailbox isn't selectable, so it has no STATUS reply.
 
3087        C: A02 LIST (SUBSCRIBED RECURSIVEMATCH) "" % RETURN (STATUS
 
3089        S: * LIST (\Subscribed) "."  "INBOX"
 
3090        S: * STATUS "INBOX" (MESSAGES 17)
 
3091        S: * LIST () "." "foo" (CHILDINFO ("SUBSCRIBED"))
 
3092        S: A02 OK List completed.
 
3094        The LIST reply for "foo" is returned because it has matching
 
3095        children, but no STATUS reply is returned because "foo" itself
 
3096        doesn't match the selection criteria.
 
3102   Responses:    REQUIRED untagged responses:  NAMESPACE
 
3104   Result:       OK -  command completed
 
3105                 NO -  Can't complete the command
 
3106                 BAD -  arguments invalid
 
3108   The NAMESPACE command causes a single untagged NAMESPACE response to
 
3109   be returned.  The untagged NAMESPACE response contains the prefix and
 
3110   hierarchy delimiter to the server's Personal Namespace(s), Other
 
3111   Users' Namespace(s), and Shared Namespace(s) that the server wishes
 
3112   to expose.  The response will contain a NIL for any namespace class
 
3113   that is not available.  The namespace-response-extensions ABNF non-
 
3114   terminal is defined for extensibility and MAY be included in the
 
3119   In this example, a server supports a single Personal Namespace.  No
 
3120   leading prefix is used on personal mailboxes, and "/" is the
 
3121   hierarchy delimiter.
 
3124     S: * NAMESPACE (("" "/")) NIL NIL
 
3125     S: A001 OK NAMESPACE command completed
 
3129   A user logged on anonymously to a server.  No personal mailboxes are
 
3130   associated with the anonymous user, and the user does not have access
 
3131   to the Other Users' Namespace.  No prefix is required to access
 
3132   shared mailboxes, and the hierarchy delimiter is "."
 
3135     S: * NAMESPACE NIL NIL (("" "."))
 
3136     S: A001 OK NAMESPACE command completed
 
3140   A server that contains a Personal Namespace and a single Shared
 
3144     S: * NAMESPACE (("" "/")) NIL (("Public Folders/" "/"))
 
3145     S: A001 OK NAMESPACE command completed
 
3149   A server that contains a Personal Namespace, Other Users' Namespace,
 
3150   and multiple Shared Namespaces.  Note that the hierarchy delimiter
 
3151   used within each namespace can be different.
 
3154     S: * NAMESPACE (("" "/")) (("~" "/")) (("#shared/" "/")
 
3155         ("#public/" "/")("#ftp/" "/")("#news." "."))
 
3156     S: A001 OK NAMESPACE command completed
 
3158   The prefix string allows a client to do things such as automatically
 
3159   create personal mailboxes or LIST all available mailboxes within a
 
3164   A server that supports only the Personal Namespace, with a leading
 
3165   prefix of INBOX to personal mailboxes and a hierarchy delimiter of
 
3169     S: * NAMESPACE (("INBOX." ".")) NIL  NIL
 
3170     S: A001 OK NAMESPACE command completed
 
3172   Automatically create a mailbox to store sent items.
 
3174     C: A002 CREATE "INBOX.Sent Mail"
 
3175     S: A002 OK CREATE command completed
 
3177   Although a server will typically support only a single Personal
 
3178   Namespace, and a single Other User's Namespace, circumstances exist
 
3179   where there MAY be multiples of these, and a client MUST be prepared
 
3180   for them.  If a client is configured such that it is required to
 
3181   create a certain mailbox, there can be circumstances where it is
 
3182   unclear which Personal Namespaces it should create the mailbox in.
 
3183   In these situations, a client SHOULD let the user select which
 
3184   namespaces to create the mailbox in, or just use the first Personal
 
3189   In this example, a server supports two Personal Namespaces.  In
 
3190   addition to the regular Personal Namespace, the user has an
 
3191   additional Personal Namespace that allows access to mailboxes in an
 
3192   MH format mailstore.
 
3194   The client is configured to save a copy of all mail sent by the user
 
3195   into a mailbox with the \Sent attribute (see Section 7.3.1).
 
3196   Furthermore, after a message is deleted from a mailbox, the client is
 
3197   configured to move that message to a mailbox with the \Trash
 
3198   attribute.  The server signals with the \NonExistent mailbox
 
3199   attribute that the corresponding mailboxes don't exist yet and that
 
3200   it is possible to create them.  Once created, they could be used for
 
3201   \Sent or \Trash purposes, and the server will no longer include the
 
3202   \NonExistent mailbox attribute for them.
 
3204   Note that this example demonstrates how some extension parameters can
 
3205   be passed to further describe the #mh namespace.  See the fictitious
 
3206   "X-PARAM" extension parameter.
 
3209     S: * NAMESPACE (("" "/")("#mh/" "/" "X-PARAM"
 
3210         ("FLAG1" "FLAG2"))) NIL NIL
 
3211     S: A001 OK NAMESPACE command completed
 
3213     C: A002 LIST (SPECIAL-USE) "" "*"
 
3214     S: * LIST (\NonExistent \Archive) "/" Archives
 
3215     S: * LIST (\NonExistent \Drafts) "/" Drafts
 
3216     S: * LIST (\NonExistent \Junk) "/" Junk
 
3217     S: * LIST (\NonExistent \Sent) "/" "Sent Mail"
 
3218     S: * LIST (\NonExistent \Trash) "/" "Deleted Items"
 
3219     S: A002 OK LIST Completed
 
3221     C: A003 LIST (SPECIAL-USE) "#mh/" "*"
 
3222     S: * LIST (\NonExistent \Archive) "/" "#mh/Archives"
 
3223     S: * LIST (\NonExistent \Drafts) "/" "#mh/Drafts"
 
3224     S: * LIST (\NonExistent \Junk) "/" "#mh/Junk"
 
3225     S: * LIST (\NonExistent \Sent) "/" "#mh/Sent Mail"
 
3226     S: * LIST (\NonExistent \Trash) "/" "#mh/Deleted Items"
 
3227     S: A003 OK LIST Completed
 
3229   It is desired to keep only one copy of sent mail.  It is unclear
 
3230   which Personal Namespace the client should use to create the 'Sent
 
3231   Mail' mailbox.  The user is prompted to select a namespace, and only
 
3232   one 'Sent Mail' mailbox is created.
 
3234     C: A004 CREATE "Sent Mail"
 
3235     S: A004 OK CREATE command completed
 
3237   The client is designed so that it keeps two 'Deleted Items'
 
3238   mailboxes, one for each namespace.
 
3240     C: A005 CREATE "Delete Items"
 
3241     S: A005 OK CREATE command completed
 
3243     C: A006 CREATE "#mh/Deleted Items"
 
3244     S: A006 OK CREATE command completed
 
3246   The next level of hierarchy following the Other Users' Namespace
 
3247   prefix SHOULD consist of <username>, where <username> is a user name
 
3248   as per the LOGIN or AUTHENTICATE command.
 
3250   A client can construct a LIST command by appending a "%" to the Other
 
3251   Users' Namespace prefix to discover the Personal Namespaces of other
 
3252   users that are available to the currently authenticated user.
 
3254   In response to such a LIST command, a server SHOULD NOT return user
 
3255   names that have not granted access to their personal mailboxes to the
 
3258   A server MAY return a LIST response containing only the names of
 
3259   users that have explicitly granted access to the user in question.
 
3261   Alternatively, a server MAY return NO to such a LIST command,
 
3262   requiring that a user name be included with the Other Users'
 
3263   Namespace prefix before listing any other user's mailboxes.
 
3267   A server that supports providing a list of other user's mailboxes
 
3268   that are accessible to the currently logged on user.
 
3271     S: * NAMESPACE (("" "/")) (("Other Users/" "/")) NIL
 
3272     S: A001 OK NAMESPACE command completed
 
3274     C: A002 LIST "" "Other Users/%"
 
3275     S: * LIST () "/" "Other Users/Mike"
 
3276     S: * LIST () "/" "Other Users/Karen"
 
3277     S: * LIST () "/" "Other Users/Matthew"
 
3278     S: * LIST () "/" "Other Users/Tesa"
 
3279     S: A002 OK LIST command completed
 
3283   A server that does not support providing a list of other user's
 
3284   mailboxes that are accessible to the currently logged on user.  The
 
3285   mailboxes are listable if the client includes the name of the other
 
3286   user with the Other Users' Namespace prefix.
 
3289     S: * NAMESPACE (("" "/")) (("#Users/" "/")) NIL
 
3290     S: A001 OK NAMESPACE command completed
 
3292   In this example, the currently logged on user has access to the
 
3293   Personal Namespace of user Mike, but the server chose to suppress
 
3294   this information in the LIST response.  However, by appending the
 
3295   user name Mike (received through user input) to the Other Users'
 
3296   Namespace prefix, the client is able to get a listing of the personal
 
3297   mailboxes of user Mike.
 
3299     C: A002 LIST "" "#Users/%"
 
3300     S: A002 NO The requested item could not be found.
 
3302     C: A003 LIST "" "#Users/Mike/%"
 
3303     S: * LIST () "/" "#Users/Mike/INBOX"
 
3304     S: * LIST () "/" "#Users/Mike/Foo"
 
3305     S: A003 OK LIST command completed.
 
3307   A prefix string might not contain a hierarchy delimiter, because in
 
3308   some cases, it is not needed as part of the prefix.
 
3312   A server that allows access to the Other Users' Namespace by
 
3313   prefixing the others' mailboxes with a '~' followed by <username>,
 
3314   where <username> is a user name as per the LOGIN or AUTHENTICATE
 
3318     S: * NAMESPACE (("" "/")) (("~" "/")) NIL
 
3319     S: A001 OK NAMESPACE command completed
 
3321   List the mailboxes for user mark
 
3323     C: A002 LIST "" "~mark/%"
 
3324     S: * LIST () "/" "~mark/INBOX"
 
3325     S: * LIST () "/" "~mark/foo"
 
3326     S: A002 OK LIST command completed
 
3330   Arguments:    mailbox name
 
3332                 status data item names
 
3334   Responses:    REQUIRED untagged responses:  STATUS
 
3336   Result:       OK -  status completed
 
3337                 NO -  status failure: no status for that name
 
3338                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
3340   The STATUS command requests the status of the indicated mailbox.  It
 
3341   does not change the currently selected mailbox, nor does it affect
 
3342   the state of any messages in the queried mailbox.
 
3344   The STATUS command provides an alternative to opening a second
 
3345   IMAP4rev2 connection and doing an EXAMINE command on a mailbox to
 
3346   query that mailbox's status without deselecting the current mailbox
 
3347   in the first IMAP4rev2 connection.
 
3349   Unlike the LIST command, the STATUS command is not guaranteed to be
 
3350   fast in its response.  Under certain circumstances, it can be quite
 
3351   slow.  In some implementations, the server is obliged to open the
 
3352   mailbox as "read-only" internally to obtain certain status
 
3353   information.  Also unlike the LIST command, the STATUS command does
 
3354   not accept wildcards.
 
3356      Note: The STATUS command is intended to access the status of
 
3357      mailboxes other than the currently selected mailbox.  Because the
 
3358      STATUS command can cause the mailbox to be opened internally, and
 
3359      because this information is available by other means on the
 
3360      selected mailbox, the STATUS command SHOULD NOT be used on the
 
3361      currently selected mailbox.  However, servers MUST be able to
 
3362      execute the STATUS command on the selected mailbox.  (This might
 
3363      also implicitly happen when the STATUS return option is used in a
 
3366      The STATUS command MUST NOT be used as a "check for new messages
 
3367      in the selected mailbox" operation (refer to Sections 7 and 7.4.1
 
3368      for more information about the proper method for new message
 
3371      STATUS SIZE (see below) can take a significant amount of time,
 
3372      depending upon server implementation.  Clients should use STATUS
 
3375   The currently defined status data items that can be requested are:
 
3378      The number of messages in the mailbox.
 
3381      The next unique identifier value of the mailbox.  Refer to
 
3382      Section 2.3.1.1 for more information.
 
3385      The unique identifier validity value of the mailbox.  Refer to
 
3386      Section 2.3.1.1 for more information.
 
3389      The number of messages that do not have the \Seen flag set.
 
3392      The number of messages that have the \Deleted flag set.
 
3395      The total size of the mailbox in octets.  This is not strictly
 
3396      required to be an exact value, but it MUST be equal to or greater
 
3397      than the sum of the values of the RFC822.SIZE FETCH message data
 
3398      items (see Section 6.4.5) of all messages in the mailbox.
 
3402     C: A042 STATUS blurdybloop (UIDNEXT MESSAGES)
 
3403     S: * STATUS blurdybloop (MESSAGES 231 UIDNEXT 44292)
 
3404     S: A042 OK STATUS completed
 
3408   Arguments:    mailbox name
 
3410                 OPTIONAL flag parenthesized list
 
3412                 OPTIONAL date/time string
 
3416   Responses:    OPTIONAL untagged response:  LIST
 
3418   Result:       OK -  append completed
 
3419                 NO -  append error: can't append to that mailbox, error
 
3420                    in flags or date/time or message text
 
3421                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
3423   The APPEND command appends the literal argument as a new message to
 
3424   the end of the specified destination mailbox.  This argument SHOULD
 
3425   be in the format of an [RFC5322] or [I18N-HDRS] message.  8-bit
 
3426   characters are permitted in the message.  A server implementation
 
3427   that is unable to preserve 8-bit data properly MUST be able to
 
3428   reversibly convert 8-bit APPEND data to 7 bits using a [MIME-IMB]
 
3429   content transfer encoding.
 
3431      Note: There may be exceptions, such as draft messages, in which
 
3432      required [RFC5322] header fields are omitted in the message
 
3433      literal argument to APPEND.  The full implications of doing so
 
3434      must be understood and carefully weighed.
 
3436   If a flag parenthesized list is specified, the flags SHOULD be set in
 
3437   the resulting message; otherwise, the flag list of the resulting
 
3438   message is set to "empty" by default.
 
3440   If a date-time is specified, the internal date SHOULD be set in the
 
3441   resulting message; otherwise, the internal date of the resulting
 
3442   message is set to the current date and time by default.
 
3444   If the append is unsuccessful for any reason, the mailbox MUST be
 
3445   restored to its state before the APPEND attempt (other than possibly
 
3446   keeping the changed mailbox's UIDNEXT value); no partial appending is
 
3449   If the destination mailbox does not exist, a server MUST return an
 
3450   error and MUST NOT automatically create the mailbox.  Unless it is
 
3451   certain that the destination mailbox cannot be created, the server
 
3452   MUST send the response code "[TRYCREATE]" as the prefix of the text
 
3453   of the tagged NO response.  This gives a hint to the client that it
 
3454   can attempt a CREATE command and retry the APPEND if the CREATE is
 
3457   On successful completion of an APPEND, the server returns an
 
3458   APPENDUID response code (see Section 7.1), unless otherwise specified
 
3461   In the case of a mailbox that has permissions set so that the client
 
3462   can APPEND to the mailbox, but not SELECT or EXAMINE it, the server
 
3463   MUST NOT send an APPENDUID response code as it would disclose
 
3464   information about the mailbox.
 
3466   In the case of a mailbox that has UIDNOTSTICKY status (see
 
3467   Section 7.1), the server MAY omit the APPENDUID response code as it
 
3470   If the mailbox is currently selected, normal new message actions
 
3471   SHOULD occur.  Specifically, the server SHOULD notify the client
 
3472   immediately via an untagged EXISTS response.  If the server does not
 
3473   do so, the client MAY issue a NOOP command after one or more APPEND
 
3476   If the server decides to convert (normalize) the mailbox name, it
 
3477   SHOULD return an untagged LIST with an OLDNAME extended data item,
 
3478   with the OLDNAME value being the supplied mailbox name and the name
 
3479   parameter being the normalized mailbox name.  (See Section 6.3.9.7
 
3484     C: A003 APPEND saved-messages (\Seen) {326}
 
3485     S: + Ready for literal data
 
3486     C: Date: Mon, 7 Feb 1994 21:52:25 -0800 (PST)
 
3487     C: From: Fred Foobar <foobar@Blurdybloop.example>
 
3488     C: Subject: afternoon meeting
 
3489     C: To: mooch@owatagu.siam.edu.example
 
3490     C: Message-Id: <B27397-0100000@Blurdybloop.example>
 
3491     C: MIME-Version: 1.0
 
3492     C: Content-Type: TEXT/PLAIN; CHARSET=US-ASCII
 
3494     C: Hello Joe, do you think we can meet at 3:30 tomorrow?
 
3496     S: A003 OK APPEND completed
 
3500     C: A003 APPEND saved-messages (\Seen) {297+}
 
3501     C: Date: Mon, 7 Feb 1994 21:52:25 -0800 (PST)
 
3502     C: From: Fred Foobar <foobar@example.com>
 
3503     C: Subject: afternoon meeting
 
3504     C: To: mooch@example.com
 
3505     C: Message-Id: <B27397-0100000@example.com>
 
3506     C: MIME-Version: 1.0
 
3507     C: Content-Type: TEXT/PLAIN; CHARSET=US-ASCII
 
3509     C: Hello Joe, do you think we can meet at 3:30 tomorrow?
 
3511     S: A003 OK [APPENDUID 38505 3955] APPEND completed
 
3512     C: A004 COPY 2:4 meeting
 
3513     S: A004 OK [COPYUID 38505 304,319:320 3956:3958] Done
 
3514     C: A005 UID COPY 305:310 meeting
 
3515     S: A005 OK No matching messages, so nothing copied
 
3516     C: A006 COPY 2 funny
 
3518     C: A007 SELECT funny
 
3520     S: * OK [UIDVALIDITY 3857529045] Validity session-only
 
3521     S: * OK [UIDNEXT 2] Predicted next UID
 
3522     S: * NO [UIDNOTSTICKY] Non-persistent UIDs
 
3523     S: * FLAGS (\Answered \Flagged \Deleted \Seen \Draft)
 
3524     S: * OK [PERMANENTFLAGS (\Deleted \Seen)] Limited
 
3525     S: * LIST () "." funny
 
3526     S: A007 OK [READ-WRITE] SELECT completed
 
3528   In this example, A003 and A004 demonstrate successful appending and
 
3529   copying to a mailbox that returns the UIDs assigned to the messages.
 
3530   A005 is an example in which no messages were copied; this is because
 
3531   in A003, we see that message 2 had UID 304, and message 3 had UID
 
3532   319; therefore, UIDs 305 through 310 do not exist (refer to
 
3533   Section 2.3.1.1 for further explanation).  A006 is an example of a
 
3534   message being copied that did not return a COPYUID; and, as expected,
 
3535   A007 shows that the mail store containing that mailbox does not
 
3536   support persistent UIDs.
 
3538      |  Note: The APPEND command is not used for message delivery,
 
3539      |  because it does not provide a mechanism to transfer [SMTP]
 
3540      |  envelope information.
 
3546   Responses:    continuation data will be requested; the client sends
 
3547                 the continuation data "DONE" to end the command
 
3549   Result:       OK -  IDLE completed after client sent "DONE"
 
3550                 NO -  failure: the server will not allow the IDLE
 
3551                    command at this time
 
3552                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
3554   Without the IDLE command, a client would need to poll the server for
 
3555   changes to the selected mailbox (new mail, deletions, and flag
 
3556   changes).  It's often more desirable to have the server transmit
 
3557   updates to the client in real time.  This allows a user to see new
 
3558   mail immediately.  The IDLE command allows a client to tell the
 
3559   server that it's ready to accept such real-time updates.
 
3561   The IDLE command is sent from the client to the server when the
 
3562   client is ready to accept unsolicited update messages.  The server
 
3563   requests a response to the IDLE command using the continuation ("+")
 
3564   response.  The IDLE command remains active until the client responds
 
3565   to the continuation, and as long as an IDLE command is active, the
 
3566   server is now free to send untagged EXISTS, EXPUNGE, FETCH, and other
 
3567   responses at any time.  If the server chooses to send unsolicited
 
3568   FETCH responses, they MUST include a UID FETCH item.
 
3570   The IDLE command is terminated by the receipt of a "DONE"
 
3571   continuation from the client; such response satisfies the server's
 
3572   continuation request.  At that point, the server MAY send any
 
3573   remaining queued untagged responses and then MUST immediately send
 
3574   the tagged response to the IDLE command and prepare to process other
 
3575   commands.  As for other commands, the processing of any new command
 
3576   may cause the sending of unsolicited untagged responses, subject to
 
3577   the ambiguity limitations.  The client MUST NOT send a command while
 
3578   the server is waiting for the DONE, since the server will not be able
 
3579   to distinguish a command from a continuation.
 
3581   The server MAY consider a client inactive if it has an IDLE command
 
3582   running, and if such a server has an inactivity timeout, it MAY log
 
3583   the client off implicitly at the end of its timeout period.  Because
 
3584   of that, clients using IDLE are advised to terminate IDLE and reissue
 
3585   it at least every 29 minutes to avoid being logged off.  This still
 
3586   allows a client to receive immediate mailbox updates even though it
 
3587   need only "poll" at half hour intervals.
 
3591     C: A001 SELECT INBOX
 
3592     S: * FLAGS (\Deleted \Seen \Flagged)
 
3593     S: * OK [PERMANENTFLAGS (\Deleted \Seen \Flagged)] Limited
 
3595     S: * OK [UIDVALIDITY 1]
 
3597     S: * LIST () "/" INBOX
 
3598     S: A001 OK [READ-WRITE] SELECT completed
 
3601     ...time passes; new mail arrives...
 
3604     S: A002 OK IDLE terminated
 
3605     ...another client expunges message 2 now...
 
3608     S: A003 OK FETCH completed
 
3613     ...time passes; another client expunges message 3...
 
3616     ...time passes; new mail arrives...
 
3619     S: A004 OK IDLE terminated
 
3622     S: A005 OK FETCH completed
 
36256.4.  Client Commands - Selected State
 
3627   In the selected state, commands that manipulate messages in a mailbox
 
3630   In addition to the universal commands (CAPABILITY, NOOP, and LOGOUT),
 
3631   and the authenticated state commands (SELECT, EXAMINE, NAMESPACE,
 
3632   CREATE, DELETE, RENAME, SUBSCRIBE, UNSUBSCRIBE, LIST, STATUS, and
 
3633   APPEND), the following commands are valid in the selected state:
 
3634   CLOSE, UNSELECT, EXPUNGE, SEARCH, FETCH, STORE, COPY, MOVE, and UID.
 
3640   Responses:    no specific responses for this command
 
3642   Result:       OK -  close completed, now in authenticated state
 
3643                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
3645   The CLOSE command permanently removes all messages that have the
 
3646   \Deleted flag set from the currently selected mailbox, and it returns
 
3647   to the authenticated state from the selected state.  No untagged
 
3648   EXPUNGE responses are sent.
 
3650   No messages are removed, and no error is given, if the mailbox is
 
3651   selected by an EXAMINE command or is otherwise selected as read-only.
 
3653   Even if a mailbox is selected, a SELECT, EXAMINE, or LOGOUT command
 
3654   MAY be issued without previously issuing a CLOSE command.  The
 
3655   SELECT, EXAMINE, and LOGOUT commands implicitly close the currently
 
3656   selected mailbox without doing an expunge.  However, when many
 
3657   messages are deleted, a CLOSE-LOGOUT or CLOSE-SELECT sequence is
 
3658   considerably faster than an EXPUNGE-LOGOUT or EXPUNGE-SELECT because
 
3659   no untagged EXPUNGE responses (which the client would probably
 
3665     S: A341 OK CLOSE completed
 
3671   Responses:    no specific responses for this command
 
3673   Result:       OK -  unselect completed, now in authenticated state
 
3674                 BAD -  no mailbox selected, or argument supplied but
 
3677   The UNSELECT command frees a session's resources associated with the
 
3678   selected mailbox and returns the server to the authenticated state.
 
3679   This command performs the same actions as CLOSE, except that no
 
3680   messages are permanently removed from the currently selected mailbox.
 
3685     S: A342 OK Unselect completed
 
3691   Responses:    untagged responses:  EXPUNGE
 
3693   Result:       OK -  expunge completed
 
3694                 NO -  expunge failure: can't expunge (e.g., permission
 
3696                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
3698   The EXPUNGE command permanently removes all messages that have the
 
3699   \Deleted flag set from the currently selected mailbox.  Before
 
3700   returning an OK to the client, an untagged EXPUNGE response is sent
 
3701   for each message that is removed.
 
3710     S: A202 OK EXPUNGE completed
 
3712   Note: In this example, messages 3, 4, 7, and 11 had the \Deleted flag
 
3713   set.  See the description of the EXPUNGE response (Section 7.5.1) for
 
3714   further explanation.
 
3718   Arguments:    OPTIONAL result specifier
 
3720                 OPTIONAL [CHARSET] specification
 
3722                 searching criteria (one or more)
 
3724   Responses:    OPTIONAL untagged response:  ESEARCH
 
3726   Result:       OK -  search completed
 
3727                 NO -  search error: can't search that [CHARSET] or
 
3729                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
3731   The SEARCH command searches the mailbox for messages that match the
 
3732   given searching criteria.
 
3734   The SEARCH command may contain result options.  Result options
 
3735   control what kind of information is returned about messages matching
 
3736   the search criteria in an untagged ESEARCH response.  If no result
 
3738   ALL is assumed (see below).  The order of individual options is
 
3739   arbitrary.  Individual options may contain parameters enclosed in
 
3740   parentheses.  (However, if an option has a mandatory parameter, which
 
3741   can always be represented as a number or a sequence-set, the option
 
3742   parameter does not need the enclosing parentheses.  See "Formal
 
3743   Syntax" (Section 9) for more details.)  If an option has parameters,
 
3744   they consist of atoms and/or strings and/or lists in a specific
 
3746   supports MUST be rejected with a BAD response.
 
3748   Note that IMAP4rev1 used SEARCH responses [RFC3501] instead of
 
3749   ESEARCH responses.  Clients that support only IMAP4rev2 MUST ignore
 
3752   This document specifies the following result options:
 
3755      Return the lowest message number/UID that satisfies the SEARCH
 
3759      the MIN result option in the ESEARCH response; however, it still
 
3760      MUST send the ESEARCH response.
 
3763      Return the highest message number/UID that satisfies the SEARCH
 
3766      If the SEARCH results in no matches, the server MUST NOT include
 
3767      the MAX result option in the ESEARCH response; however, it still
 
3768      MUST send the ESEARCH response.
 
3771      Return all message numbers/UIDs that satisfy the SEARCH criteria
 
3772      using the sequence-set syntax.  Note that the client MUST NOT
 
3773      assume that messages/UIDs will be listed in any particular order.
 
3775      If the SEARCH results in no matches, the server MUST NOT include
 
3776      the ALL result option in the ESEARCH response; however, it still
 
3777      MUST send the ESEARCH response.
 
3780      Return the number of messages that satisfy the SEARCH criteria.
 
3781      This result option MUST always be included in the ESEARCH
 
3785      This option tells the server to remember the result of the SEARCH
 
3786      or UID SEARCH command (as well as any command based on SEARCH,
 
3787      e.g., SORT and THREAD [RFC5256]) and store it in an internal
 
3788      variable that we will reference as the "search result variable".
 
3789      The client can use the "$" marker to reference the content of this
 
3790      internal variable.  The "$" marker can be used instead of message
 
3791      sequence or UID sequence in order to indicate that the server
 
3792      should substitute it with the list of messages from the search
 
3793      result variable.  Thus, the client can use the result of the
 
3794      latest remembered SEARCH command as a parameter to another
 
3795      command.  See Section 6.4.4.1 for details on how the value of the
 
3796      search result variable is determined, how it is affected by other
 
3797      commands executed, and how the SAVE return option interacts with
 
3798      other return options.
 
3801      option also suppresses any ESEARCH response that would have been
 
3802      otherwise returned by the SEARCH command.
 
3804   Note: future extensions to this document can allow servers to return
 
3805   multiple ESEARCH responses for a single extended SEARCH command.
 
3806   However, all options specified above MUST result in a single ESEARCH
 
3807   response if used by themselves or in combination.  This guarantee
 
3808   simplifies processing in IMAP4rev2 clients.  Future SEARCH extensions
 
3809   that relax this restriction will have to describe how results from
 
3810   multiple ESEARCH responses are to be combined.
 
3812   Searching criteria consist of one or more search keys.
 
3814   When multiple keys are specified, the result is the intersection (AND
 
3815   function) of all the messages that match those keys.  For example,
 
3816   the criteria DELETED FROM "SMITH" SINCE 1-Feb-1994 refers to all
 
3817   deleted messages from Smith with INTERNALDATE greater than February
 
3818   1, 1994.  A search key can also be a parenthesized list of one or
 
3819   more search keys (e.g., for use with the OR and NOT keys).
 
3821   Server implementations MAY exclude [MIME-IMB] body parts with
 
3822   terminal content media types other than TEXT and MESSAGE from
 
3823   consideration in SEARCH matching.
 
3825   The OPTIONAL [CHARSET] specification consists of the word "CHARSET"
 
3826   followed by the name of a character set from the registry
 
3827   [CHARSET-REG].  It indicates the [CHARSET] of the strings that appear
 
3828   in the search criteria.  [MIME-IMB] content transfer encodings and
 
3829   [MIME-HDRS] strings in [RFC5322]/[MIME-IMB] headers MUST be decoded
 
3830   before comparing text.  Servers MUST support US-ASCII and UTF-8
 
3831   charsets; other CHARSETs MAY be supported.  Clients SHOULD use UTF-8.
 
3832   Note that if CHARSET is not provided, IMAP4rev2 servers MUST assume
 
3833   UTF-8, so selecting CHARSET UTF-8 is redundant.  It is permitted for
 
3834   improved compatibility with existing IMAP4rev1 clients.
 
3837   return a tagged NO response (not a BAD).  This response SHOULD
 
3838   contain the BADCHARSET response code, which MAY list the CHARSETs
 
3839   supported by the server.
 
3841   In all search keys that use strings, and unless otherwise specified,
 
3842   a message matches the key if the string is a substring of the
 
3843   associated text.  The matching SHOULD be case insensitive for
 
3844   characters within the ASCII range.  Consider using [IMAP-I18N] for
 
3845   language-sensitive, case-insensitive searching.  Note that the empty
 
3846   string is a substring; this is useful when performing a HEADER search
 
3847   in order to test for a header field presence in the message.
 
3849   The defined search keys are as follows.  Refer to "Formal Syntax"
 
3850   (Section 9) for the precise syntactic definitions of the arguments.
 
3853      Messages with message sequence numbers corresponding to the
 
3854      specified message sequence number set.
 
3857      All messages in the mailbox; the default initial key for ANDing.
 
3860      Messages with the \Answered flag set.
 
3863      Messages that contain the specified string in the envelope
 
3864      structure's Blind Carbon Copy (BCC) field.
 
3867      Messages whose internal date (disregarding time and timezone) is
 
3868      earlier than the specified date.
 
3871      Messages that contain the specified string in the body of the
 
3872      message.  Unlike TEXT (see below), this doesn't match any header
 
3873      fields.  Servers are allowed to implement flexible matching for
 
3874      this search key, for example, by matching "swim" to both "swam"
 
3875      and "swum" in English language text or only performing full word
 
3876      matching (where "swim" will not match "swimming").
 
3879      Messages that contain the specified string in the envelope
 
3880      structure's CC field.
 
3883      Messages with the \Deleted flag set.
 
3886      Messages with the \Draft flag set.
 
3889      Messages with the \Flagged flag set.
 
3892      Messages that contain the specified string in the envelope
 
3893      structure's FROM field.
 
3896      Messages that have a header field with the specified field-name
 
3897      (as defined in [RFC5322]) and that contain the specified string in
 
3898      the text of the header field (what comes after the colon).  If the
 
3899      string to search is zero-length, this matches all messages that
 
3900      have a header field with the specified field-name regardless of
 
3901      the contents.  Servers should use a substring search for this
 
3902      SEARCH item, as clients can use it for automatic processing not
 
3903      initiated by end users.  For example, this can be used when
 
3904      searching for Message-ID or Content-Type header field values that
 
3905      need to be exact or for searches in header fields that the IMAP
 
3906      server might not know anything about.
 
3909      Messages with the specified keyword flag set.
 
3912      Messages with an RFC822.SIZE larger than the specified number of
 
3916      Messages that do not match the specified search key.
 
3919      Messages whose internal date (disregarding time and timezone) is
 
3920      within the specified date.
 
3922   OR <search-key1> <search-key2>
 
3923      Messages that match either search key.
 
3926      Messages that have the \Seen flag set.
 
3929      Messages whose [RFC5322] Date: header field (disregarding time and
 
3930      timezone) is earlier than the specified date.
 
3933      Messages whose [RFC5322] Date: header field (disregarding time and
 
3934      timezone) is within the specified date.
 
3937      Messages whose [RFC5322] Date: header field (disregarding time and
 
3938      timezone) is within or later than the specified date.
 
3941      Messages whose internal date (disregarding time and timezone) is
 
3942      within or later than the specified date.
 
3945      Messages with an RFC822.SIZE smaller than the specified number of
 
3949      Messages that contain the specified string in the envelope
 
3950      structure's SUBJECT field.
 
3953      Messages that contain the specified string in the header
 
3954      (including MIME header fields) or body of the message.  Servers
 
3955      are allowed to implement flexible matching for this search key,
 
3956      for example, matching "swim" to both "swam" and "swum" in English
 
3957      language text or only performing full-word matching (where "swim"
 
3958      will not match "swimming").
 
3961      Messages that contain the specified string in the envelope
 
3962      structure's TO field.
 
3965      Messages with unique identifiers corresponding to the specified
 
3966      unique identifier set.  Sequence-set ranges are permitted.
 
3969      Messages that do not have the \Answered flag set.
 
3972      Messages that do not have the \Deleted flag set.
 
3975      Messages that do not have the \Draft flag set.
 
3978      Messages that do not have the \Flagged flag set.
 
3981      Messages that do not have the specified keyword flag set.
 
3984      Messages that do not have the \Seen flag set.
 
3988     C: A282 SEARCH RETURN (MIN COUNT) FLAGGED
 
3989         SINCE 1-Feb-1994 NOT FROM "Smith"
 
3990     S: * ESEARCH (TAG "A282") MIN 2 COUNT 3
 
3991     S: A282 OK SEARCH completed
 
3995     C: A283 SEARCH RETURN () FLAGGED
 
3996         SINCE 1-Feb-1994 NOT FROM "Smith"
 
3997     S: * ESEARCH (TAG "A283") ALL 2,10:11
 
3998     S: A283 OK SEARCH completed
 
4002     C: A284 SEARCH TEXT "string not in mailbox"
 
4003     S: * ESEARCH (TAG "A284")
 
4004     S: A284 OK SEARCH completed
 
4005     C: A285 SEARCH CHARSET UTF-8 TEXT {12}
 
4006     S: + Ready for literal text
 
4008     S: * ESEARCH (TAG "A285") ALL 43
 
4009     S: A285 OK SEARCH completed
 
4012   The following example demonstrates finding the first unseen message
 
4017     C: A284 SEARCH RETURN (MIN) UNSEEN
 
4018     S: * ESEARCH (TAG "A284") MIN 4
 
4019     S: A284 OK SEARCH completed
 
4021   The following example demonstrates that if the ESEARCH UID indicator
 
4022   is present, all data in the ESEARCH response is referring to UIDs;
 
4023   for example, the MIN result specifier will be followed by a UID.
 
4027     C: A285 UID SEARCH RETURN (MIN MAX) 1:5000
 
4028     S: * ESEARCH (TAG "A285") UID MIN 7 MAX 3800
 
4029     S: A285 OK SEARCH completed
 
4031   The following example demonstrates returning the number of deleted
 
4036     C: A286 SEARCH RETURN (COUNT) DELETED
 
4037     S: * ESEARCH (TAG "A286") COUNT 15
 
4038     S: A286 OK SEARCH completed
 
4042   Upon successful completion of a SELECT or an EXAMINE command (after
 
4043   the tagged OK response), the current search result variable is reset
 
4044   to the empty sequence.
 
4046   A successful SEARCH command with the SAVE result option sets the
 
4047   value of the search result variable to the list of messages found in
 
4048   the SEARCH command.  For example, if no messages were found, the
 
4049   search result variable will contain the empty sequence.
 
4051   Any of the following SEARCH commands MUST NOT change the search
 
4054      a SEARCH command that caused the server to return the BAD tagged
 
4057      a SEARCH command with no SAVE result option that caused the server
 
4058      to return NO tagged response, and
 
4060      a successful SEARCH command with no SAVE result option.
 
4062   A SEARCH command with the SAVE result option that caused the server
 
4063   to return the NO tagged response sets the value of the search result
 
4064   variable to the empty sequence.
 
4066   When a message listed in the search result variable is EXPUNGEd, it
 
4067   is automatically removed from the list.  Implementors are reminded
 
4068   that if the server stores the list as a list of message numbers, it
 
4069   MUST automatically adjust them when notifying the client about
 
4070   expunged messages, as described in Section 7.5.1.
 
4072   If the server decides to send a new UIDVALIDITY value while the
 
4073   mailbox is opened, it causes the resetting of the search variable to
 
4076   Note that even if the "$" marker contains the empty sequence of
 
4077   messages, it must be treated by all commands accepting message sets
 
4078   as parameters as a valid, but non-matching, list of messages.  For
 
4079   example, the "FETCH $" command would return a tagged OK response and
 
4080   no FETCH responses.  See also Example 5 in Section 6.4.4.4.
 
4082   The SAVE result option doesn't change whether the server would return
 
4083   items corresponding to MIN, MAX, ALL, or COUNT result options.
 
4085   When the SAVE result option is combined with the MIN or MAX result
 
4086   option, and both ALL and COUNT result options are absent, the
 
4087   corresponding MIN/MAX is returned (if the search result is not
 
4088   empty), but the "$" marker would contain a single message as returned
 
4089   in the MIN/MAX return item.
 
4091   If the SAVE result option is combined with both MIN and MAX result
 
4092   options, and both ALL and COUNT result options are absent, the "$"
 
4093   marker would contain zero messages, one message, or two messages as
 
4094   returned in the MIN/MAX return items.
 
4096   If the SAVE result option is combined with the ALL and/or COUNT
 
4097   result option(s), the "$" marker would always contain all messages
 
4098   found by the SEARCH or UID SEARCH command.
 
4100   The following table summarizes the additional requirement on ESEARCH
 
4101   server implementations described in this section.
 
4103           +==============================+====================+
 
4104           | Combination of Result Option |  "$" Marker Value  |
 
4105           +==============================+====================+
 
4107           +------------------------------+--------------------+
 
4109           +------------------------------+--------------------+
 
4110           |         SAVE MIN MAX         |     MIN & MAX      |
 
4111           +------------------------------+--------------------+
 
4112           |          SAVE * [m]          | all found messages |
 
4113           +------------------------------+--------------------+
 
4117   where '*' means "ALL" and/or "COUNT", and '[m]' means optional "MIN"
 
4120   Implementation note: server implementors should note that "$" can
 
4121   reference IMAP message sequences or UID sequences, depending on the
 
4122   context where it is used.  For example, the "$" marker can be set as
 
4123   a result of a SEARCH (SAVE) command and used as a parameter to a UID
 
4124   FETCH command (which accepts a UID sequence, not a message sequence),
 
4125   or the "$" marker can be set as a result of a UID SEARCH (SAVE)
 
4126   command and used as a parameter to a FETCH command (which accepts a
 
4127   message sequence, not a UID sequence).  Server implementations need
 
4128   to automatically map the "$" marker value to message numbers or UIDs,
 
4129   depending on the context where the "$" marker is used.
 
41316.4.4.2.  Multiple Commands in Progress
 
4133   Use of a SEARCH RETURN (SAVE) command followed by a command using the
 
4134   "$" marker creates direct dependency between the two commands.  As
 
4135   directed by Section 5.5, a server MUST execute the two commands in
 
4136   the order they were received.
 
4138   A client MAY pipeline a SEARCH RETURN (SAVE) command with one or more
 
4139   commands using the "$" marker, as long as this doesn't create an
 
4140   ambiguity, as described in Section 5.5.  Examples 7-9 in
 
4141   Section 6.4.4.4 explain this in more details.
 
41436.4.4.3.  Refusing to Save Search Results
 
4145   In some cases, the server MAY refuse to save a SEARCH (SAVE) result,
 
4146   for example, if an internal limit on the number of saved results is
 
4147   reached.  In this case, the server MUST return a tagged NO response
 
4148   containing the NOTSAVED response code and set the search result
 
4149   variable to the empty sequence, as described in Section 6.4.4.1.
 
41516.4.4.4.  Examples Showing Use of the SAVE Result Option
 
4153   Only in this section: explanatory comments in examples that start
 
4154   with // are not part of the protocol.
 
4156   1.  The following example demonstrates how the client can use the
 
4157       result of a SEARCH command to FETCH headers of interesting
 
4162        C: A282 SEARCH RETURN (SAVE) FLAGGED SINCE 1-Feb-1994
 
4164        S: A282 OK SEARCH completed, result saved
 
4165        C: A283 FETCH $ (UID INTERNALDATE FLAGS BODY.PEEK[HEADER])
 
4166        S: * 2 FETCH (UID 14 ...
 
4167        S: * 84 FETCH (UID 100 ...
 
4168        S: * 882 FETCH (UID 1115 ...
 
4169        S: A283 OK completed
 
4171       The client can also pipeline the two commands:
 
4175        C: A282 SEARCH RETURN (SAVE) FLAGGED SINCE 1-Feb-1994
 
4177        C: A283 FETCH $ (UID INTERNALDATE FLAGS BODY.PEEK[HEADER])
 
4178        S: A282 OK SEARCH completed
 
4179        S: * 2 FETCH (UID 14 ...
 
4180        S: * 84 FETCH (UID 100 ...
 
4181        S: * 882 FETCH (UID 1115 ...
 
4182        S: A283 OK completed
 
4184   2.  The following example demonstrates that the result of one SEARCH
 
4185       command can be used as input to another SEARCH command:
 
4189        C: A300 SEARCH RETURN (SAVE) SINCE 1-Jan-2004
 
4191        S: A300 OK SEARCH completed
 
4192        C: A301 UID SEARCH UID $ SMALLER 4096
 
4193        S: * ESEARCH (TAG "A301") UID ALL 17,900,901
 
4194        S: A301 OK completed
 
4196       Note that the second command in Example 3 can be replaced with:
 
4198        C: A301 UID SEARCH $ SMALLER 4096
 
4200       and the result of the command would be the same.
 
4202   3.  The following example shows that the "$" marker can be combined
 
4203       with other message numbers using the OR SEARCH criterion.
 
4207        C: P282 SEARCH RETURN (SAVE) SINCE 1-Feb-1994
 
4209        S: P282 OK SEARCH completed
 
4210        C: P283 SEARCH CHARSET UTF-8 (OR $ 1,3000:3021) TEXT {8+}
 
4212        S: * ESEARCH (TAG "P283") ALL 882,1102,3003,3005:3006
 
4213        S: P283 OK completed
 
4215   4.  The following example demonstrates that a failed SEARCH sets the
 
4216       search result variable to the empty list.  The server doesn't
 
4217       implement the KOI8-R charset.
 
4221        C: B282 SEARCH RETURN (SAVE) SINCE 1-Feb-1994
 
4223        S: B282 OK SEARCH completed
 
4224        C: B283 SEARCH RETURN (SAVE) CHARSET KOI8-R
 
4225            (OR $ 1,3000:3021) TEXT {4}
 
4227        S: B283 NO [BADCHARSET UTF-8] KOI8-R is not supported
 
4228       //After this command, the saved result variable contains
 
4229       //no messages.  A client that wants to reissue the B283
 
4230       //SEARCH command with another CHARSET would have to reissue
 
4231       //the B282 command as well.  One possible workaround for
 
4232       //this is to include the desired CHARSET parameter
 
4233       //in the earliest SEARCH RETURN (SAVE) command in a
 
4234       //sequence of related SEARCH commands, to cause
 
4235       //the earliest SEARCH in the sequence to fail.
 
4236       //A better approach might be to always use CHARSET UTF-8
 
4239       Note: Since this document format is restricted to 7-bit ASCII
 
4240       text, it is not possible to show actual KOI8-R data.  The "XXXX"
 
4241       is a placeholder for what would be 4 octets of 8-bit data in an
 
4244   5.  The following example demonstrates that it is not an error to use
 
4245       the "$" marker when it contains no messages.
 
4249        C: E282 SEARCH RETURN (SAVE) SINCE 28-Oct-2006
 
4251        C: E283 COPY $ "Other Messages"
 
4252       //The "$" contains no messages
 
4253        S: E282 OK SEARCH completed
 
4254        S: E283 OK COPY completed, nothing copied
 
4258        C: F282 SEARCH RETURN (SAVE) KEYWORD $Junk
 
4259        C: F283 COPY $ "Junk"
 
4260        C: F284 STORE $ +FLAGS.Silent (\Deleted)
 
4261        S: F282 OK SEARCH completed
 
4262        S: F283 OK COPY completed
 
4263        S: F284 OK STORE completed
 
4267        C: G282 SEARCH RETURN (SAVE) KEYWORD $Junk
 
4268        C: G283 SEARCH RETURN (ALL) SINCE 28-Oct-2006
 
4270       // The server can execute the two SEARCH commands
 
4271       // in any order, as they don't have any dependency.
 
4272       // For example, it may return:
 
4273        S: * ESEARCH (TAG "G283") ALL 3:15,27,29:103
 
4274        S: G283 OK SEARCH completed
 
4275        S: G282 OK SEARCH completed
 
4277       The following example demonstrates that the result of the second
 
4278       SEARCH RETURN (SAVE) always overrides the result of the first.
 
4282        C: H282 SEARCH RETURN (SAVE) KEYWORD $Junk
 
4283        C: H283 SEARCH RETURN (SAVE) SINCE 28-Oct-2006
 
4285        S: H282 OK SEARCH completed
 
4286        S: H283 OK SEARCH completed
 
4287       // At this point "$" would contain results of H283
 
4289       The following example demonstrates behavioral difference for
 
4290       different combinations of ESEARCH result options.
 
4294        C: C282 SEARCH RETURN (ALL) SINCE 12-Feb-2006
 
4296        S: * ESEARCH (TAG "C283") ALL 2,10:15,21
 
4297      //$ value hasn't changed
 
4298        S: C282 OK SEARCH completed
 
4300        C: C283 SEARCH RETURN (ALL SAVE) SINCE 12-Feb-2006
 
4302        S: * ESEARCH (TAG "C283") ALL 2,10:15,21
 
4303      //$ value is 2,10:15,21
 
4304        S: C283 OK SEARCH completed
 
4306        C: C284 SEARCH RETURN (SAVE MIN) SINCE 12-Feb-2006
 
4308        S: * ESEARCH (TAG "C284") MIN 2
 
4310        S: C284 OK SEARCH completed
 
4312        C: C285 SEARCH RETURN (MAX SAVE MIN) SINCE
 
4313            12-Feb-2006 NOT FROM "Smith"
 
4314        S: * ESEARCH (TAG "C285") MIN 2 MAX 21
 
4316        S: C285 OK SEARCH completed
 
4318        C: C286 SEARCH RETURN (MAX SAVE MIN COUNT)
 
4319            SINCE 12-Feb-2006 NOT FROM "Smith"
 
4320        S: * ESEARCH (TAG "C286") MIN 2 MAX 21 COUNT 8
 
4321      //$ value is 2,10:15,21
 
4322        S: C286 OK SEARCH completed
 
4324        C: C286 SEARCH RETURN (ALL SAVE MIN) SINCE
 
4325            12-Feb-2006 NOT FROM "Smith"
 
4326        S: * ESEARCH (TAG "C286") MIN 2 ALL 2,10:15,21
 
4327      //$ value is 2,10:15,21
 
4328        S: C286 OK SEARCH completed
 
4332   Arguments:    sequence set
 
4334                 message data item names or macro
 
4336   Responses:    untagged responses:  FETCH
 
4338   Result:       OK -  fetch completed
 
4339                 NO -  fetch error: can't fetch that data
 
4340                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
4342   The FETCH command retrieves data associated with a message in the
 
4343   mailbox.  The data items to be fetched can be either a single atom or
 
4344   a parenthesized list.
 
4346   Most data items, identified in the formal syntax (Section 9) under
 
4347   the msg-att-static rule, are static and MUST NOT change for any
 
4348   particular message.  Other data items, identified in the formal
 
4349   syntax under the msg-att-dynamic rule, MAY change either as a result
 
4350   of a STORE command or due to external events.
 
4352      For example, if a client receives an ENVELOPE for a message when
 
4353      it already knows the envelope, it can safely ignore the newly
 
4354      transmitted envelope.
 
4356   There are three macros that specify commonly used sets of data items
 
4357   and can be used instead of data items.  A macro must be used by
 
4358   itself and not in conjunction with other macros or data items.
 
4361      Macro equivalent to: (FLAGS INTERNALDATE RFC822.SIZE ENVELOPE)
 
4364      Macro equivalent to: (FLAGS INTERNALDATE RFC822.SIZE)
 
4367      Macro equivalent to: (FLAGS INTERNALDATE RFC822.SIZE ENVELOPE
 
4370   Several data items reference "section" or "section-binary".  See
 
4371   Section 6.4.5.1 for their detailed definition.
 
4373   The currently defined data items that can be fetched are:
 
4375   BINARY[<section-binary>]<<partial>>
 
4376      Requests that the specified section be transmitted after
 
4377      performing decoding of the section's Content-Transfer-Encoding.
 
4379      The <partial> argument, if present, requests that a subset of the
 
4380      data be returned.  The semantics of a partial FETCH BINARY command
 
4381      are the same as for a partial FETCH BODY command, with the
 
4382      exception that the <partial> arguments refer to the DECODED
 
4386      parts: those that have media types other than multipart/*,
 
4387      message/rfc822, or message/global.
 
4389   BINARY.PEEK[<section-binary>]<<partial>>
 
4390      An alternate form of BINARY[<section-binary>] that does not
 
4391      implicitly set the \Seen flag.
 
4393   BINARY.SIZE[<section-binary>]
 
4394      Requests the decoded size of the section (i.e., the size to expect
 
4395      in response to the corresponding FETCH BINARY request).
 
4397      Note: client authors are cautioned that this might be an expensive
 
4398      operation for some server implementations.  Needlessly issuing
 
4399      this request could result in degraded performance due to servers
 
4400      having to calculate the value every time the request is issued.
 
4402      Note that this data item can only be requested for leaf body
 
4403      parts: those that have media types other than multipart/*,
 
4404      message/rfc822, or message/global.
 
4407      Non-extensible form of BODYSTRUCTURE.
 
4409   BODY[<section>]<<partial>>
 
4410      The text of a particular body section.  If BODY[] is specified
 
4411      (the section specification is omitted), the FETCH is requesting
 
4412      the [RFC5322] expression of the entire message.
 
4414      It is possible to fetch a substring of the designated text.  This
 
4415      is done by appending an open angle bracket ("<"), the octet
 
4416      position of the first desired octet, a period, the maximum number
 
4417      of octets desired, and a close angle bracket (">") to the part
 
4419      an empty string is returned.
 
4421      Any partial fetch that attempts to read beyond the end of the text
 
4422      is truncated as appropriate.  A partial fetch that starts at octet
 
4423      0 is returned as a partial fetch, even if this truncation
 
4426         Note: This means that BODY[]<0.2048> of a 1500-octet message
 
4427         will return BODY[]<0> with a literal of size 1500, not BODY[].
 
4429         Note: A substring fetch of a HEADER.FIELDS or HEADER.FIELDS.NOT
 
4430         part specifier is calculated after subsetting the header.
 
4432      The \Seen flag is implicitly set; if this causes the flags to
 
4433      change, they SHOULD be included as part of the FETCH responses.
 
4435   BODY.PEEK[<section>]<<partial>>
 
4436      An alternate form of BODY[<section>] that does not implicitly set
 
4440      The [MIME-IMB] body structure of the message.  This is computed by
 
4441      the server by parsing the [MIME-IMB] header fields in the
 
4442      [RFC5322] header and [MIME-IMB] headers.  See Section 7.5.2 for
 
4446      The envelope structure of the message.  This is computed by the
 
4447      server by parsing the [RFC5322] header into the component parts,
 
4448      defaulting various fields as necessary.  See Section 7.5.2 for
 
4452      The flags that are set for this message.
 
4455      The internal date of the message.
 
4458      The size of the message, as defined in Section 2.3.4.
 
4461      The unique identifier for the message.
 
4465     C: A654 FETCH 2:4 (FLAGS BODY[HEADER.FIELDS (DATE FROM)])
 
4469     S: A654 OK FETCH completed
 
44716.4.5.1.  FETCH Section Specification
 
4473   Several FETCH data items reference "section" or "section-binary".
 
4474   The section specification is a set of zero or more part specifiers
 
4475   delimited by periods.  A part specifier is either a part number or
 
4476   one of the following: HEADER, HEADER.FIELDS, HEADER.FIELDS.NOT, MIME,
 
4477   and TEXT.  (Non-numeric part specifiers have to be the last specifier
 
4478   in a section specification.)  An empty section specification refers
 
4479   to the entire message, including the header.
 
4482   MIME, and MIME messages that are not multipart and have no
 
4483   encapsulated message within them, only have a part 1.
 
4486   occur in the message.  If a particular part is of type message or
 
4487   multipart, its parts MUST be indicated by a period followed by the
 
4488   part number within that nested multipart part.
 
4490   A part of type MESSAGE/RFC822 or MESSAGE/GLOBAL also has nested part
 
4491   numbers, referring to parts of the MESSAGE part's body.
 
4493   The HEADER, HEADER.FIELDS, HEADER.FIELDS.NOT, and TEXT part
 
4494   specifiers can be the sole part specifier or can be prefixed by one
 
4495   or more numeric part specifiers, provided that the numeric part
 
4496   specifier refers to a part of type MESSAGE/RFC822 or MESSAGE/GLOBAL.
 
4500   The HEADER, HEADER.FIELDS, and HEADER.FIELDS.NOT part specifiers
 
4501   refer to the [RFC5322] header of the message or of an encapsulated
 
4502   [MIME-IMT] MESSAGE/RFC822 or MESSAGE/GLOBAL message.  HEADER.FIELDS
 
4503   and HEADER.FIELDS.NOT are followed by a list of field-names (as
 
4504   defined in [RFC5322]) and return a subset of the header.  The subset
 
4505   returned by HEADER.FIELDS contains only those header fields with a
 
4506   field-name that matches one of the names in the list; similarly, the
 
4507   subset returned by HEADER.FIELDS.NOT contains only the header fields
 
4508   with a non-matching field-name.  The field-matching is ASCII-range
 
4509   case insensitive but is otherwise exact.  Subsetting does not exclude
 
4510   the [RFC5322] delimiting blank line between the header and the body;
 
4511   the blank line is included in all header fetches, except in the case
 
4512   of a message that has no body and no blank line.
 
4514   The MIME part specifier refers to the [MIME-IMB] header for this
 
4518   omitting the [RFC5322] header.
 
4523     HEADER     ([RFC5322] header of the message)
 
4524     TEXT       ([RFC5322] text body of the message) MULTIPART/MIXED
 
4526     2          APPLICATION/OCTET-STREAM
 
4528     3.HEADER   ([RFC5322] header of the message)
 
4529     3.TEXT     ([RFC5322] text body of the message) MULTIPART/MIXED
 
4531     3.2        APPLICATION/OCTET-STREAM
 
4536     4.2.HEADER ([RFC5322] header of the message)
 
4537     4.2.TEXT   ([RFC5322] text body of the message) MULTIPART/MIXED
 
4539     4.2.2      MULTIPART/ALTERNATIVE
 
4541     4.2.2.2    TEXT/RICHTEXT
 
4545   Arguments:    sequence set
 
4547                 message data item name
 
4549                 value for message data item
 
4551   Responses:    untagged responses:  FETCH
 
4553   Result:       OK -  store completed
 
4554                 NO -  store error: can't store that data
 
4555                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
4557   The STORE command alters data associated with a message in the
 
4558   mailbox.  Normally, STORE will return the updated value of the data
 
4559   with an untagged FETCH response.  A suffix of ".SILENT" in the data
 
4560   item name prevents the untagged FETCH, and the server SHOULD assume
 
4561   that the client has determined the updated value itself or does not
 
4562   care about the updated value.
 
4564      Note: Regardless of whether or not the ".SILENT" suffix was used,
 
4565      the server SHOULD send an untagged FETCH response if a change to a
 
4566      message's flags from an external source is observed.  The intent
 
4567      is that the status of the flags is determinate without a race
 
4570   The currently defined data items that can be stored are:
 
4573      Replace the flags for the message with the argument.  The new
 
4574      value of the flags is returned as if a FETCH of those flags was
 
4577   FLAGS.SILENT <flag list>
 
4578      Equivalent to FLAGS, but without returning a new value.
 
4581      Add the argument to the flags for the message.  The new value of
 
4582      the flags is returned as if a FETCH of those flags was done.
 
4584   +FLAGS.SILENT <flag list>
 
4585      Equivalent to +FLAGS, but without returning a new value.
 
4588      Remove the argument from the flags for the message.  The new value
 
4589      of the flags is returned as if a FETCH of those flags was done.
 
4591   -FLAGS.SILENT <flag list>
 
4592      Equivalent to -FLAGS, but without returning a new value.
 
4596     C: A003 STORE 2:4 +FLAGS (\Deleted)
 
4597     S: * 2 FETCH (FLAGS (\Deleted \Seen))
 
4598     S: * 3 FETCH (FLAGS (\Deleted))
 
4599     S: * 4 FETCH (FLAGS (\Deleted \Flagged \Seen))
 
4600     S: A003 OK STORE completed
 
4604   Arguments:    sequence set
 
4608   Responses:    no specific responses for this command
 
4610   Result:       OK -  copy completed
 
4611                 NO -  copy error: can't copy those messages or to that
 
4613                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
4615   The COPY command copies the specified message(s) to the end of the
 
4616   specified destination mailbox.  The flags and internal date of the
 
4617   message(s) SHOULD be preserved in the copy.
 
4619   If the destination mailbox does not exist, a server MUST return an
 
4620   error.  It MUST NOT automatically create the mailbox.  Unless it is
 
4621   certain that the destination mailbox can not be created, the server
 
4622   MUST send the response code "[TRYCREATE]" as the prefix of the text
 
4623   of the tagged NO response.  This gives a hint to the client that it
 
4624   can attempt a CREATE command and retry the COPY if the CREATE is
 
4627   If the COPY command is unsuccessful for any reason, server
 
4628   implementations MUST restore the destination mailbox to its state
 
4629   before the COPY attempt (other than possibly incrementing UIDNEXT),
 
4630   i.e., partial copy MUST NOT be done.
 
4632   On successful completion of a COPY, the server returns a COPYUID
 
4633   response code (see Section 7.1).  Two exceptions to this requirement
 
4636   In the case of a mailbox that has permissions set so that the client
 
4637   can COPY to the mailbox, but not SELECT or EXAMINE it, the server
 
4638   MUST NOT send a COPYUID response code as it would disclose
 
4639   information about the mailbox.
 
4641   In the case of a mailbox that has UIDNOTSTICKY status (see
 
4642   Section 7.1), the server MAY omit the COPYUID response code as it is
 
4647     C: A003 COPY 2:4 MEETING
 
4648     S: A003 OK [COPYUID 38505 304,319:320 3956:3958] COPY completed
 
4652   Arguments:    sequence set
 
4656   Responses:    no specific responses for this command
 
4658   Result:       OK -  move completed
 
4659                 NO -  move error: can't move those messages or to that
 
4661                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
4663   The MOVE command moves the specified message(s) to the end of the
 
4664   specified destination mailbox.  The flags and internal date of the
 
4665   message(s) SHOULD be preserved.
 
4667   This means that a new message is created in the target mailbox with a
 
4668   new UID, the original message is removed from the source mailbox, and
 
4669   it appears to the client as a single action.  This has the same
 
4670   effect for each message as this sequence:
 
4674   2.  [UID] STORE +FLAGS.SILENT \DELETED
 
4678   Although the effect of the MOVE is the same as the preceding steps,
 
4679   the semantics are not identical: the intermediate states produced by
 
4680   those steps do not occur, and the response codes are different.  In
 
4681   particular, though the COPY and EXPUNGE response codes will be
 
4682   returned, response codes for a STORE MUST NOT be generated, and the
 
4683   \Deleted flag MUST NOT be set for any message.
 
4685   Unlike the COPY command, MOVE of a set of messages might fail partway
 
4686   through the set.  Regardless of whether the command is successful in
 
4687   moving the entire set, each individual message MUST be either moved
 
4688   or unaffected.  The server MUST leave each message in a state where
 
4689   it is in at least one of the source or target mailboxes (no message
 
4690   can be lost or orphaned).  The server SHOULD NOT leave any message in
 
4691   both mailboxes (it would be bad for a partial failure to result in a
 
4692   bunch of duplicate messages).  This is true even if the server
 
4693   returns a tagged NO response to the command.
 
4695   If the destination mailbox does not exist, a server MUST return an
 
4696   error.  It MUST NOT automatically create the mailbox.  Unless it is
 
4697   certain that the destination mailbox cannot be created, the server
 
4698   MUST send the response code "[TRYCREATE]" as the prefix of the text
 
4699   of the tagged NO response.  This gives a hint to the client that it
 
4700   can attempt a CREATE command and retry the MOVE if the CREATE is
 
4703   Because of the similarity of MOVE to COPY, extensions that affect
 
4704   COPY affect MOVE in the same way.  Response codes listed in
 
4705   Section 7.1, as well as those defined by extensions, are sent as
 
4709   Section 6.4.9) command.  For additional information about COPYUID,
 
4710   see Section 7.1.  Note that there are several exceptions listed in
 
4711   Section 6.4.7 that allow servers not to return COPYUID.
 
4714   untagged OK before sending EXPUNGE or similar responses.  (Sending
 
4715   COPYUID in the tagged OK, as described in Section 6.4.7, means that
 
4716   clients first receive an EXPUNGE for a message and afterwards COPYUID
 
4717   for the same message.  It can be unnecessarily difficult to process
 
4718   that sequence usefully.)
 
4722     C: a UID MOVE 42:69 foo
 
4723     S: * OK [COPYUID 432432 42:69 1202:1229]
 
4725     ...More EXPUNGE responses from the server...
 
4728   Note that the server may send unrelated EXPUNGE responses as well, if
 
4729   any happen to have been expunged at the same time; this is normal
 
4732   Note that moving a message to the currently selected mailbox (that
 
4733   is, where the source and target mailboxes are the same) is allowed
 
4734   when copying the message to the currently selected mailbox is
 
4737   The server may send EXPUNGE responses before the tagged response, so
 
4738   the client cannot safely send more commands with message sequence
 
4739   number arguments while the server is processing MOVE.
 
4741   MOVE and UID MOVE can be pipelined with other commands, but care has
 
4742   to be taken.  Both commands modify sequence numbers and also allow
 
4743   unrelated EXPUNGE responses.  The renumbering of other messages in
 
4744   the source mailbox following any EXPUNGE response can be surprising
 
4745   and makes it unsafe to pipeline any command that relies on message
 
4746   sequence numbers after a MOVE or UID MOVE.  Similarly, MOVE cannot be
 
4747   pipelined with a command that might cause message renumbering.  See
 
4748   Section 5.5 for more information about ambiguities as well as
 
4749   handling requirements for both clients and servers.
 
4753   Arguments:    command name
 
4757   Responses:    untagged responses:  FETCH, ESEARCH, EXPUNGE
 
4759   Result:       OK -  UID command completed
 
4760                 NO -  UID command error
 
4761                 BAD -  command unknown or arguments invalid
 
4763   The UID command has three forms.  In the first form, it takes as its
 
4764   arguments a COPY, MOVE, FETCH, or STORE command with arguments
 
4765   appropriate for the associated command.  However, the numbers in the
 
4766   sequence-set argument are unique identifiers instead of message
 
4767   sequence numbers.  Sequence-set ranges are permitted, but there is no
 
4768   guarantee that unique identifiers will be contiguous.
 
4770   A non-existent unique identifier is ignored without any error message
 
4771   generated.  Thus, it is possible for a UID FETCH command to return an
 
4772   OK without any data or a UID COPY, UID MOVE, or UID STORE to return
 
4773   an OK without performing any operations.
 
4776   extra parameter that specifies a sequence set of UIDs to operate on.
 
4777   The UID EXPUNGE command permanently removes all messages that have
 
4778   both the \Deleted flag set and a UID that is included in the
 
4779   specified sequence set from the currently selected mailbox.  If a
 
4780   message either does not have the \Deleted flag set or has a UID that
 
4781   is not included in the specified sequence set, it is not affected.
 
4783   UID EXPUNGE is particularly useful for disconnected use clients.  By
 
4784   using UID EXPUNGE instead of EXPUNGE when resynchronizing with the
 
4785   server, the client can ensure that it does not inadvertently remove
 
4786   any messages that have been marked as \Deleted by other clients
 
4787   between the time that the client was last connected and the time the
 
4788   client resynchronizes.
 
4792     C: A003 UID EXPUNGE 3000:3002
 
4796     S: A003 OK UID EXPUNGE completed
 
4798   In the third form, the UID command takes a SEARCH command with SEARCH
 
4799   command arguments.  The interpretation of the arguments is the same
 
4800   as with SEARCH; however, the numbers returned in an ESEARCH response
 
4801   for a UID SEARCH command are unique identifiers instead of message
 
4802   sequence numbers.  Also, the corresponding ESEARCH response MUST
 
4803   include the UID indicator.  For example, the command UID SEARCH 1:100
 
4804   UID 443:557 returns the unique identifiers corresponding to the
 
4805   intersection of two sequence sets, the message sequence number range
 
4806   1:100, and the UID range 443:557.
 
4808      Note: in the above example, the UID range 443:557 appears.  The
 
4809      same comment about a non-existent unique identifier being ignored
 
4810      without any error message also applies here.  Hence, even if
 
4811      neither UID 443 or 557 exist, this range is valid and would
 
4812      include an existing UID 495.
 
4815      last message in the mailbox, even if 559 is higher than any
 
4816      assigned UID value.  This is because the contents of a range are
 
4817      independent of the order of the range endpoints.  Thus, any UID
 
4818      range with * as one of the endpoints indicates at least one
 
4819      message (the message with the highest numbered UID), unless the
 
4822   The number after the "*" in an untagged FETCH or EXPUNGE response is
 
4823   always a message sequence number, not a unique identifier, even for a
 
4824   UID command response.  However, server implementations MUST
 
4825   implicitly include the UID message data item as part of any FETCH
 
4826   response caused by a UID command, regardless of whether a UID was
 
4827   specified as a message data item to the FETCH.
 
4829   Note: The rule about including the UID message data item as part of a
 
4830   FETCH response primarily applies to the UID FETCH and UID STORE
 
4831   commands, including a UID FETCH command that does not include UID as
 
4832   a message data item.  Although it is unlikely that the other UID
 
4833   commands will cause an untagged FETCH, this rule applies to these
 
4838     C: A999 UID FETCH 4827313:4828442 FLAGS
 
4839     S: * 23 FETCH (FLAGS (\Seen) UID 4827313)
 
4840     S: * 24 FETCH (FLAGS (\Seen) UID 4827943)
 
4841     S: * 25 FETCH (FLAGS (\Seen) UID 4828442)
 
4842     S: A999 OK UID FETCH completed
 
48446.5.  Client Commands - Experimental/Expansion
 
4846   Each command that is not part of this specification MUST have at
 
4847   least one capability name (see Section 6.1.1) associated with it.
 
4848   (Multiple commands can be associated with the same capability name.)
 
4850   Server implementations MUST NOT send any added untagged responses
 
4851   (not specified in this specification), unless the client requested it
 
4852   by issuing the associated experimental command (specified in an
 
4853   extension document) or the ENABLE command (Section 6.3.1).
 
4855   The following example demonstrates how a client can check for the
 
4856   presence of a fictitious XPIG-LATIN capability that adds the XPIG-
 
4857   LATIN command and the XPIG-LATIN untagged response.  (Note that for
 
4858   an extension, the command name and the capability name don't have to
 
4864     S: * CAPABILITY IMAP4rev2 XPIG-LATIN
 
4865     S: a441 OK CAPABILITY completed
 
4867     S: * XPIG-LATIN ow-nay eaking-spay ig-pay atin-lay
 
4868     S: A442 OK XPIG-LATIN ompleted-cay
 
4872   Server responses are in three forms: status responses, server data,
 
4873   and command continuation requests.  The information contained in a
 
4874   server response, identified by "Contents:" in the response
 
4875   descriptions below, is described by function, not by syntax.  The
 
4876   precise syntax of server responses is described in "Formal Syntax"
 
4879   The client MUST be prepared to accept any response at all times.
 
4881   Status responses can be tagged or untagged.  Tagged status responses
 
4882   indicate the completion result (OK, NO, or BAD status) of a client
 
4883   command and have a tag matching the command.
 
4885   Some status responses, and all server data, are untagged.  An
 
4886   untagged response is indicated by the token "*" instead of a tag.
 
4887   Untagged status responses indicate server greeting or server status
 
4888   that does not indicate the completion of a command (for example, an
 
4889   impending system shutdown alert).  For historical reasons, untagged
 
4890   server data responses are also called "unsolicited data", although
 
4891   strictly speaking, only unilateral server data is truly
 
4894   Certain server data MUST be remembered by the client when it is
 
4895   received; this is noted in the description of that data.  Such data
 
4896   conveys critical information that affects the interpretation of all
 
4897   subsequent commands and responses (e.g., updates reflecting the
 
4898   creation or destruction of messages).
 
4900   Other server data SHOULD be remembered for later reference; if the
 
4901   client does not need to remember the data, or if remembering the data
 
4902   has no obvious purpose (e.g., a SEARCH response when no SEARCH
 
4903   command is in progress), the data can be ignored.
 
4905   An example of unilateral untagged server data occurs when the IMAP
 
4906   connection is in the selected state.  In the selected state, the
 
4907   server checks the mailbox for new messages as part of command
 
4908   execution.  Normally, this is part of the execution of every command;
 
4909   hence, a NOOP command suffices to check for new messages.  If new
 
4910   messages are found, the server sends an untagged EXISTS response
 
4911   reflecting the new size of the mailbox.  Server implementations that
 
4912   offer multiple simultaneous access to the same mailbox SHOULD also
 
4913   send appropriate unilateral untagged FETCH and EXPUNGE responses if
 
4914   another agent changes the state of any message flags or expunges any
 
4917   Command continuation request responses use the token "+" instead of a
 
4918   tag.  These responses are sent by the server to indicate acceptance
 
4919   of an incomplete client command and readiness for the remainder of
 
49227.1.  Server Responses - Generic Status Responses
 
4924   Status responses are OK, NO, BAD, PREAUTH, and BYE.  OK, NO, and BAD
 
4925   can be tagged or untagged.  PREAUTH and BYE are always untagged.
 
4927   Status responses MAY include an OPTIONAL "response code".  A response
 
4928   code consists of data inside square brackets in the form of an atom,
 
4929   possibly followed by a space and arguments.  The response code
 
4930   contains additional information or status codes for client software
 
4931   beyond the OK/NO/BAD condition and are defined when there is a
 
4932   specific action that a client can take based upon the additional
 
4935   The currently defined response codes are:
 
4938      The human-readable text contains a special alert that is presented
 
4939      to the user in a fashion that calls the user's attention to the
 
4940      message.  Content of ALERT response codes received on a connection
 
4941      without TLS or SASL security-layer confidentiality SHOULD be
 
4942      ignored by clients.  If displayed, such alerts MUST be clearly
 
4943      marked as potentially suspicious.  (Note that some existing
 
4944      clients are known to hyperlink returned text, which make them very
 
4945      dangerous.)  Alerts received after successful establishment of a
 
4946      TLS/SASL confidentiality layer MUST be presented to the user.
 
4949      The operation attempts to create something that already exists,
 
4950      such as when a CREATE or RENAME command attempts to create a
 
4951      mailbox and there is already one of that name.
 
4953        C: o356 RENAME this that
 
4954        S: o356 NO [ALREADYEXISTS] Mailbox "that" already exists
 
4957      Followed by the UIDVALIDITY of the destination mailbox and the UID
 
4958      assigned to the appended message in the destination mailbox, it
 
4959      indicates that the message has been appended to the destination
 
4960      mailbox with that UID.
 
4962      If the server also supports the [MULTIAPPEND] extension, and if
 
4963      multiple messages were appended in the APPEND command, then the
 
4964      second value is a UID set containing the UIDs assigned to the
 
4965      appended messages, in the order they were transmitted in the
 
4966      APPEND command.  This UID set may not contain extraneous UIDs or
 
4969         Note: the UID set form of the APPENDUID response code MUST NOT
 
4970         be used if only a single message was appended.  In particular,
 
4971         a server MUST NOT send a range such as 123:123.  This is
 
4972         because a client that does not support [MULTIAPPEND] expects
 
4973         only a single UID and not a UID set.
 
4975      UIDs are assigned in strictly ascending order in the mailbox
 
4976      (refer to Section 2.3.1.1); note that a range of 12:10 is exactly
 
4977      equivalent to 10:12 and refers to the sequence 10,11,12.
 
4979      This response code is returned in a tagged OK response to the
 
4982   AUTHENTICATIONFAILED
 
4983      Authentication failed for some reason on which the server is
 
4984      unwilling to elaborate.  Typically, this includes "unknown user"
 
4987      This is the same as not sending any response code, except that
 
4988      when a client sees AUTHENTICATIONFAILED, it knows that the problem
 
4989      wasn't, e.g., UNAVAILABLE, so there's no point in trying the same
 
4990      login/password again later.
 
4992        C: b LOGIN "fred" "foo"
 
4993        S: b NO [AUTHENTICATIONFAILED] Authentication failed
 
4996      Authentication succeeded in using the authentication identity, but
 
4997      the server cannot or will not allow the authentication identity to
 
4998      act as the requested authorization identity.  This is only
 
4999      applicable when the authentication and authorization identities
 
5002        C: c1 AUTHENTICATE PLAIN
 
5004        S: c1 NO [AUTHORIZATIONFAILED] No such authorization-ID
 
5006        C: c2 AUTHENTICATE PLAIN
 
5008        S: c2 NO [AUTHORIZATIONFAILED] Authenticator is not an admin
 
5011      Optionally followed by a parenthesized list of charsets.  A SEARCH
 
5012      failed because the given charset is not supported by this
 
5013      implementation.  If the optional list of charsets is given, this
 
5014      lists the charsets that are supported by this implementation.
 
5017      This operation violates some invariant of the server and can never
 
5020        C: l create "///////"
 
5021        S: l NO [CANNOT] Adjacent slashes are not supported
 
5024      Followed by a list of capabilities.  This can appear in the
 
5025      initial OK or PREAUTH response to transmit an initial capabilities
 
5026      list.  It can also appear in tagged responses to LOGIN or
 
5027      AUTHENTICATE commands.  This makes it unnecessary for a client to
 
5028      send a separate CAPABILITY command if it recognizes this response
 
5029      code and there was no change to the TLS and/or authentication
 
5030      state since it was received.
 
5033      The server has detected a client bug.  This can accompany any of
 
5034      OK, NO, and BAD, depending on what the client bug is.
 
5036        C: k1 select "/archive/projects/experiment-iv"
 
5038        S: k1 OK [READ-ONLY] Done
 
5039        C: k2 status "/archive/projects/experiment-iv" (messages)
 
5041        S: k2 OK [CLIENTBUG] Done
 
5044      The CLOSED response code has no parameters.  A server returns the
 
5045      CLOSED response code when the currently selected mailbox is closed
 
5046      implicitly using the SELECT or EXAMINE command on another mailbox.
 
5047      The CLOSED response code serves as a boundary between responses
 
5048      for the previously opened mailbox (which was closed) and the newly
 
5049      selected mailbox; all responses before the CLOSED response code
 
5050      relate to the mailbox that was closed, and all subsequent
 
5051      responses relate to the newly opened mailbox.
 
5053      There is no need to return the CLOSED response code on completion
 
5054      of the CLOSE or the UNSELECT command (or similar), whose purpose
 
5055      is to close the currently selected mailbox without opening a new
 
5059      The user should contact the system administrator or support desk.
 
5061        C: e login "fred" "foo"
 
5062        S: e NO [CONTACTADMIN]
 
5065      Followed by the UIDVALIDITY of the destination mailbox, a UID set
 
5066      containing the UIDs of the message(s) in the source mailbox that
 
5067      were copied to the destination mailbox, followed by another UID
 
5068      set containing the UIDs assigned to the copied message(s) in the
 
5069      destination mailbox, indicates that the message(s) has been copied
 
5070      to the destination mailbox with the stated UID(s).
 
5073      destination UID set corresponds to the source UID set and is in
 
5074      the same order.  Neither of the UID sets may contain extraneous
 
5075      UIDs or the symbol "*".
 
5077      UIDs are assigned in strictly ascending order in the mailbox
 
5078      (refer to Section 2.3.1.1); note that a range of 12:10 is exactly
 
5079      equivalent to 10:12 and refers to the sequence 10,11,12.
 
5081      This response code is returned in a tagged OK response to the COPY
 
5082      or UID COPY command or in the untagged OK response to the MOVE or
 
5086      The server discovered that some relevant data (e.g., the mailbox)
 
5087      are corrupt.  This response code does not include any information
 
5088      about what's corrupt, but the server can write that to its
 
5091        C: i select "/archive/projects/experiment-iv"
 
5092        S: i NO [CORRUPTION] Cannot open mailbox
 
5095      Either authentication succeeded or the server no longer had the
 
5096      necessary data; either way, access is no longer permitted using
 
5097      that passphrase.  The client or user should get a new passphrase.
 
5099        C: d login "fred" "foo"
 
5100        S: d NO [EXPIRED] That password isn't valid any more
 
5103      Someone else has issued an EXPUNGE for the same mailbox.  The
 
5104      client may want to issue NOOP soon.  [IMAP-MULTIACCESS] discusses
 
5105      this subject in depth.
 
5107        C: h search from maria@example.com
 
5108        S: * ESEARCH (TAG "h") ALL 1:3,5,8,13,21,42
 
5109        S: h OK [EXPUNGEISSUED] Search completed
 
5112      The mailbox delete operation failed because the mailbox has one or
 
5113      more children, and the server doesn't allow deletion of mailboxes
 
5116        C: m356 DELETE Notes
 
5117        S: o356 NO [HASCHILDREN] Mailbox "Notes" has children
 
5118        that need to be deleted first
 
5121      An operation has not been carried out because it involves sawing
 
5122      off a branch someone else is sitting on.  Someone else may be
 
5123      holding an exclusive lock needed for this operation, or the
 
5124      operation may involve deleting a resource someone else is using,
 
5125      typically a mailbox.
 
5127      The operation may succeed if the client tries again later.
 
5129        C: g delete "/archive/projects/experiment-iv"
 
5130        S: g NO [INUSE] Mailbox in use
 
5133      The operation ran up against an implementation limit of some kind,
 
5134      such as the number of flags on a single message or the number of
 
5135      flags used in a mailbox.
 
5137        C: m STORE 42 FLAGS f1 f2 f3 f4 f5 ... f250
 
5138        S: m NO [LIMIT] At most 32 flags in one mailbox supported
 
5141      The operation attempts to delete something that does not exist.
 
5142      Similar to ALREADYEXISTS.
 
5144        C: p RENAME this that
 
5145        S: p NO [NONEXISTENT] No such mailbox
 
5148      The access control system (e.g., ACL; see [RFC4314]) does not
 
5149      permit this user to carry out an operation, such as selecting or
 
5152        C: f select "/archive/projects/experiment-iv"
 
5153        S: f NO [NOPERM] Access denied
 
5156      The user would be over quota after the operation.  (The user may
 
5157      or may not be over quota already.)
 
5159      Note that if the server sends OVERQUOTA but doesn't support the
 
5160      IMAP QUOTA extension defined by [RFC2087], then there is a quota,
 
5161      but the client cannot find out what the quota is.
 
5163        C: n1 uid copy 1:* oldmail
 
5164        S: n1 NO [OVERQUOTA] Sorry
 
5166        C: n2 uid copy 1:* oldmail
 
5167        S: n2 OK [OVERQUOTA] You are now over your soft quota
 
5170      The human-readable text represents an error in parsing the
 
5171      [RFC5322] header or [MIME-IMB] headers of a message in the
 
5175      Followed by a parenthesized list of flags and indicates which of
 
5176      the known flags the client can change permanently.  Any flags that
 
5177      are in the FLAGS untagged response, but not in the PERMANENTFLAGS
 
5178      list, cannot be set permanently.  The PERMANENTFLAGS list can also
 
5179      include the special flag \*, which indicates that it is possible
 
5180      to create new keywords by attempting to store those keywords in
 
5181      the mailbox.  If the client attempts to STORE a flag that is not
 
5182      in the PERMANENTFLAGS list, the server will either ignore the
 
5183      change or store the state change for the remainder of the current
 
5186      There is no need for a server that included the special flag \* to
 
5187      return a new PERMANENTFLAGS response code when a new keyword was
 
5188      successfully set on a message upon client request.  However, if
 
5189      the server has a limit on the number of different keywords that
 
5190      can be stored in a mailbox and that limit is reached, the server
 
5191      MUST send a new PERMANENTFLAGS response code without the special
 
5195      The operation is not permitted due to a lack of data
 
5196      confidentiality.  If TLS is not in use, the client could try
 
5197      STARTTLS (see Section 6.2.1) or alternatively reconnect on an
 
5198      Implicit TLS port, and then repeat the operation.
 
5200        C: d login "fred" "foo"
 
5201        S: d NO [PRIVACYREQUIRED] Connection offers no privacy
 
5204        S: d NO [PRIVACYREQUIRED] Connection offers no privacy
 
5207      The mailbox is selected as read-only, or its access while selected
 
5208      has changed from read-write to read-only.
 
5211      The mailbox is selected as read-write, or its access while
 
5212      selected has changed from read-only to read-write.
 
5215      The server encountered a bug in itself or violated one of its own
 
5218        C: j select "/archive/projects/experiment-iv"
 
5219        S: j NO [SERVERBUG] This should not happen
 
5222      An APPEND, COPY, or MOVE attempt is failing because the target
 
5223      mailbox does not exist (as opposed to some other reason).  This is
 
5224      a hint to the client that the operation can succeed if the mailbox
 
5225      is first created by the CREATE command.
 
5228      Followed by a decimal number and indicates the next unique
 
5229      identifier value.  Refer to Section 2.3.1.1 for more information.
 
5232      The selected mailbox is supported by a mail store that does not
 
5233      support persistent UIDs; that is, UIDVALIDITY will be different
 
5234      each time the mailbox is selected.  Consequently, APPEND or COPY
 
5235      to this mailbox will not return an APPENDUID or COPYUID response
 
5238      This response code is returned in an untagged NO response to the
 
5241         Note: servers SHOULD NOT have any UIDNOTSTICKY mail stores.
 
5242         This facility exists to support legacy mail stores in which it
 
5243         is technically infeasible to support persistent UIDs.  This
 
5244         should be avoided when designing new mail stores.
 
5247      Followed by a decimal number and indicates the unique identifier
 
5248      validity value.  Refer to Section 2.3.1.1 for more information.
 
5251      Temporary failure because a subsystem is down.  For example, an
 
5252      IMAP server that uses a Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
 
5253      (LDAP) or Radius server for authentication might use this response
 
5254      code when the LDAP/Radius server is down.
 
5256        C: a LOGIN "fred" "foo"
 
5257        S: a NO [UNAVAILABLE] User's backend down for maintenance
 
5260      The server does not know how to decode the section's Content-
 
5263   Client implementations MUST ignore response codes that they do not
 
5269               OPTIONAL response code
 
5272   The OK response indicates an information message from the server.
 
5273   When tagged, it indicates successful completion of the associated
 
5274   command.  The human-readable text MAY be presented to the user as an
 
5275   information message.  The untagged form indicates an information-only
 
5276   message; the nature of the information MAY be indicated by a response
 
5279   The untagged form is also used as one of three possible greetings at
 
5280   connection startup.  It indicates that the connection is not yet
 
5281   authenticated and that a LOGIN or an AUTHENTICATE command is needed.
 
5285     S: * OK IMAP4rev2 server ready
 
5286     C: A001 LOGIN fred blurdybloop
 
5287     S: * OK [ALERT] System shutdown in 10 minutes
 
5288     S: A001 OK LOGIN Completed
 
5293               OPTIONAL response code
 
5296   The NO response indicates an operational error message from the
 
5297   server.  When tagged, it indicates unsuccessful completion of the
 
5298   associated command.  The untagged form indicates a warning; the
 
5299   command can still complete successfully.  The human-readable text
 
5300   describes the condition.
 
5304     C: A222 COPY 1:2 owatagusiam
 
5305     S: * NO Disk is 98% full, please delete unnecessary data
 
5306     S: A222 OK COPY completed
 
5307     C: A223 COPY 3:200 blurdybloop
 
5308     S: * NO Disk is 98% full, please delete unnecessary data
 
5309     S: * NO Disk is 99% full, please delete unnecessary data
 
5310     S: A223 NO COPY failed: disk is full
 
5315               OPTIONAL response code
 
5318   The BAD response indicates an error message from the server.  When
 
5319   tagged, it reports a protocol-level error in the client's command;
 
5320   the tag indicates the command that caused the error.  The untagged
 
5321   form indicates a protocol-level error for which the associated
 
5322   command can not be determined; it can also indicate an internal
 
5323   server failure.  The human-readable text describes the condition.
 
5327     C: ...very long command line...
 
5328     S: * BAD Command line too long
 
5330     S: * BAD Empty command line
 
5332     S: * BAD Disk crash, attempting salvage to a new disk!
 
5333     S: * OK Salvage successful, no data lost
 
5334     S: A443 OK Expunge completed
 
53367.1.4.  PREAUTH Response
 
5339               OPTIONAL response code
 
5342   The PREAUTH response is always untagged and is one of three possible
 
5343   greetings at connection startup.  It indicates that the connection
 
5344   has already been authenticated by external means; thus, no LOGIN/
 
5345   AUTHENTICATE command is needed.
 
5347   Because PREAUTH moves the connection directly to the authenticated
 
5348   state, it effectively prevents the client from using the STARTTLS
 
5349   command (Section 6.2.1).  For this reason, the PREAUTH response
 
5350   SHOULD only be returned by servers on connections that are protected
 
5351   by TLS (such as on an Implicit TLS port [RFC8314]) or protected
 
5352   through other means such as IPsec.  Clients that require mandatory
 
5353   TLS MUST close the connection after receiving the PREAUTH response on
 
5354   a non-protected port.
 
5358     S: * PREAUTH IMAP4rev2 server logged in as Smith
 
5363               OPTIONAL response code
 
5366   The BYE response is always untagged and indicates that the server is
 
5367   about to close the connection.  The human-readable text MAY be
 
5368   displayed to the user in a status report by the client.  The BYE
 
5369   response is sent under one of four conditions:
 
5371   1.  as part of a normal logout sequence.  The server will close the
 
5372       connection after sending the tagged OK response to the LOGOUT
 
5376       connection immediately.
 
5378   3.  as an announcement of an inactivity autologout.  The server
 
5379       closes the connection immediately.
 
5382       indicating that the server is not willing to accept a connection
 
5383       from this client.  The server closes the connection immediately.
 
5385   The difference between a BYE that occurs as part of a normal LOGOUT
 
5386   sequence (the first case) and a BYE that occurs because of a failure
 
5387   (the other three cases) is that the connection closes immediately in
 
5388   the failure case.  In all cases, the client SHOULD continue to read
 
5389   response data from the server until the connection is closed; this
 
5390   will ensure that any pending untagged or completion responses are
 
5395     S: * BYE Autologout; idle for too long
 
53977.2.  Server Responses - Server Status
 
5399   These responses are always untagged.  This is how server status data
 
5400   are transmitted from the server to the client.
 
54027.2.1.  ENABLED Response
 
5404   Contents:   capability listing
 
5406   The ENABLED response occurs as a result of an ENABLE command.  The
 
5407   capability listing contains a space-separated listing of capability
 
5408   names that the server supports and that were successfully enabled.
 
5409   The ENABLED response may contain no capabilities, which means that no
 
5410   extensions listed by the client were successfully enabled.
 
5414     S: * ENABLED CONDSTORE QRESYNC
 
54167.2.2.  CAPABILITY Response
 
5418   Contents:   capability listing
 
5420   The CAPABILITY response occurs as a result of a CAPABILITY command.
 
5421   The capability listing contains a space-separated listing of
 
5422   capability names that the server supports.  The capability listing
 
5423   MUST include the atom "IMAP4rev2", but note that it doesn't have to
 
5424   be the first capability listed.  The order of capability names has no
 
5427   Client and server implementations MUST implement the capabilities
 
5428   "AUTH=PLAIN" (described in [PLAIN]), and MUST implement "STARTTLS"
 
5429   and "LOGINDISABLED" on the cleartext port.  See the Security
 
5430   Considerations (Section 11) for important information related to
 
5433   A capability name that begins with "AUTH=" indicates that the server
 
5434   supports that particular authentication mechanism [SASL].
 
5436   The LOGINDISABLED capability indicates that the LOGIN command is
 
5437   disabled, and that the server will respond with a tagged NO response
 
5438   to any attempt to use the LOGIN command even if the user name and
 
5439   password are valid (their validity will not be checked).  An IMAP
 
5440   client MUST NOT issue the LOGIN command if the server advertises the
 
5441   LOGINDISABLED capability.
 
5443   Other capability names indicate that the server supports an
 
5444   extension, revision, or amendment to the IMAP4rev2 protocol.  If
 
5445   IMAP4rev1 capability is not advertised, server responses MUST conform
 
5446   to this document until the client issues a command that uses an
 
5447   additional capability.  If both IMAP4rev1 and IMAP4rev2 capabilities
 
5448   are advertised, server responses MUST conform to [RFC3501] until the
 
5449   client issues a command that uses an additional capability.  (For
 
5450   example, the client can issue ENABLE IMAP4rev2 to enable
 
5451   IMAP4rev2-specific behavior.)
 
5453   Capability names SHOULD be registered with IANA using the RFC
 
5454   Required policy [RFC8126].  A server SHOULD NOT offer unregistered
 
5457   Client implementations SHOULD NOT require any capability name other
 
5458   than "IMAP4rev2", and possibly "STARTTLS" and "LOGINDISABLED" (on a
 
5459   cleartext port).  Client implementations MUST ignore any unknown
 
5462   A server MAY send capabilities automatically, by using the CAPABILITY
 
5463   response code in the initial PREAUTH or OK responses and by sending
 
5464   an updated CAPABILITY response code in the tagged OK response as part
 
5465   of a successful authentication.  It is unnecessary for a client to
 
5466   send a separate CAPABILITY command if it recognizes these automatic
 
5467   capabilities and there was no change to the TLS and/or authentication
 
5468   state since they were received.
 
5470   The list of capabilities returned by a server MAY change during the
 
5471   connection.  In particular, it is quite common for the server to
 
5472   change the list of capabilities after successful TLS negotiation
 
5473   (STARTTLS command) and/or after successful authentication
 
5474   (AUTHENTICATE or LOGIN commands).
 
5478     S: * CAPABILITY STARTTLS AUTH=GSSAPI IMAP4rev2 LOGINDISABLED
 
5481   Note that in the above example, XPIG-LATIN is a fictitious capability
 
54847.3.  Server Responses - Mailbox Status
 
5486   These responses are always untagged.  This is how mailbox status data
 
5487   are transmitted from the server to the client.  Many of these
 
5488   responses typically result from a command with the same name.
 
5496               OPTIONAL extension data
 
5498   The LIST response occurs as a result of a LIST command.  It returns a
 
5499   single name that matches the LIST specification.  There can be
 
5500   multiple LIST responses for a single LIST command.
 
5502   The following base mailbox name attributes are defined:
 
5505      The "\NonExistent" attribute indicates that a mailbox name does
 
5506      not refer to an existing mailbox.  Note that this attribute is not
 
5507      meaningful by itself, as mailbox names that match the canonical
 
5508      LIST pattern but don't exist must not be returned unless one of
 
5509      the two conditions listed below is also satisfied:
 
5511      1.  The mailbox name also satisfies the selection criteria (for
 
5512          example, it is subscribed and the "SUBSCRIBED" selection
 
5513          option has been specified).
 
5515      2.  "RECURSIVEMATCH" has been specified, and the mailbox name has
 
5516          at least one descendant mailbox name that does not match the
 
5517          LIST pattern and does match the selection criteria.
 
5519      In practice, this means that the "\NonExistent" attribute is
 
5520      usually returned with one or more of "\Subscribed", "\Remote",
 
5521      "\HasChildren", or the CHILDINFO extended data item.
 
5523      The "\NonExistent" attribute implies "\NoSelect".
 
5526      It is not possible for any child levels of hierarchy to exist
 
5527      under this name; no child levels exist now and none can be created
 
5531      It is not possible to use this name as a selectable mailbox.
 
5534      The presence of this attribute indicates that the mailbox has
 
5535      child mailboxes.  A server SHOULD NOT set this attribute if there
 
5536      are child mailboxes and the user does not have permission to
 
5537      access any of them.  In this case, \HasNoChildren SHOULD be used.
 
5538      In many cases, however, a server may not be able to efficiently
 
5539      compute whether a user has access to any child mailboxes.  Note
 
5540      that even though the \HasChildren attribute for a mailbox must be
 
5541      correct at the time of processing the mailbox, a client must be
 
5542      prepared to deal with a situation when a mailbox is marked with
 
5543      the \HasChildren attribute, but no child mailbox appears in the
 
5544      response to the LIST command.  This might happen, for example, due
 
5545      to child mailboxes being deleted or made inaccessible to the user
 
5546      (using access control) by another client before the server is able
 
5550      The presence of this attribute indicates that the mailbox has NO
 
5551      child mailboxes that are accessible to the currently authenticated
 
5555      The mailbox has been marked "interesting" by the server; the
 
5556      mailbox probably contains messages that have been added since the
 
5557      last time the mailbox was selected.
 
5560      The mailbox does not contain any additional messages since the
 
5561      last time the mailbox was selected.
 
5564      The mailbox name was subscribed to using the SUBSCRIBE command.
 
5567      The mailbox is a remote mailbox.
 
5569   It is an error for the server to return both a \HasChildren and a
 
5570   \HasNoChildren attribute in the same LIST response.  A client that
 
5571   encounters a LIST response with both \HasChildren and \HasNoChildren
 
5572   attributes present should act as if both are absent in the LIST
 
5575      Note: the \HasNoChildren attribute should not be confused with the
 
5576      \NoInferiors attribute, which indicates that no child mailboxes
 
5577      exist now and none can be created in the future.
 
5579   If it is not feasible for the server to determine whether or not the
 
5580   mailbox is "interesting", the server SHOULD NOT send either \Marked
 
5581   or \Unmarked.  The server MUST NOT send more than one of \Marked,
 
5582   \Unmarked, and \Noselect for a single mailbox, and it MAY send none
 
5585   In addition to the base mailbox name attributes defined above, an
 
5586   IMAP server MAY also include any or all of the following attributes
 
5587   that denote "role" (or "special-use") of a mailbox.  These attributes
 
5588   are included along with base attributes defined above.  A given
 
5589   mailbox may have none, one, or more than one of these attributes.  In
 
5590   some cases, a special use is advice to a client about what to put in
 
5591   that mailbox.  In other cases, it's advice to a client about what to
 
5592   expect to find there.
 
5595      This mailbox presents all messages in the user's message store.
 
5596      Implementations MAY omit some messages, such as, perhaps, those in
 
5597      \Trash and \Junk.  When this special use is supported, it is
 
5598      almost certain to represent a virtual mailbox.
 
5601      This mailbox is used to archive messages.  The meaning of an
 
5602      "archival" mailbox is server dependent; typically, it will be used
 
5603      to get messages out of the inbox, or otherwise keep them out of
 
5604      the user's way, while still making them accessible.
 
5607      This mailbox is used to hold draft messages -- typically, messages
 
5608      that are being composed but have not yet been sent.  In some
 
5609      server implementations, this might be a virtual mailbox,
 
5610      containing messages from other mailboxes that are marked with the
 
5611      "\Draft" message flag.  Alternatively, this might just be advice
 
5612      that a client put drafts here.
 
5615      This mailbox presents all messages marked in some way as
 
5616      "important".  When this special use is supported, it is likely to
 
5617      represent a virtual mailbox collecting messages (from other
 
5618      mailboxes) that are marked with the "\Flagged" message flag.
 
5621      This mailbox is where messages deemed to be junk mail are held.
 
5622      Some server implementations might put messages here automatically.
 
5623      Alternatively, this might just be advice to a client-side spam
 
5627      This mailbox is used to hold copies of messages that have been
 
5628      sent.  Some server implementations might put messages here
 
5629      automatically.  Alternatively, this might just be advice that a
 
5630      client save sent messages here.
 
5633      This mailbox is used to hold messages that have been deleted or
 
5634      marked for deletion.  In some server implementations, this might
 
5635      be a virtual mailbox, containing messages from other mailboxes
 
5636      that are marked with the "\Deleted" message flag.  Alternatively,
 
5637      this might just be advice that a client that chooses not to use
 
5638      the IMAP "\Deleted" model should use as its trash location.  In
 
5639      server implementations that strictly expect the IMAP "\Deleted"
 
5640      model, this special use is likely not to be supported.
 
5642   All special-use attributes are OPTIONAL, and any given server or
 
5643   message store may support any combination of the attributes, or none
 
5644   at all.  In most cases, there will likely be at most one mailbox with
 
5645   a given attribute for a given user, but in some server or message
 
5646   store implementations, it might be possible for multiple mailboxes to
 
5647   have the same special-use attribute.
 
5649   Special-use attributes are likely to be user specific.  User Adam
 
5650   might share his \Sent mailbox with user Barb, but that mailbox is
 
5651   unlikely to also serve as Barb's \Sent mailbox.
 
5653   Other mailbox name attributes can be found in the "IMAP Mailbox Name
 
5654   Attributes" registry [IMAP-MAILBOX-NAME-ATTRS-REG].
 
5656   The hierarchy delimiter is a character used to delimit levels of
 
5657   hierarchy in a mailbox name.  A client can use it to create child
 
5658   mailboxes and to search higher or lower levels of naming hierarchy.
 
5659   All children of a top-level hierarchy node MUST use the same
 
5660   separator character.  A NIL hierarchy delimiter means that no
 
5661   hierarchy exists; the name is a "flat" name.
 
5663   The name represents an unambiguous left-to-right hierarchy and MUST
 
5664   be valid for use as a reference in LIST command.  Unless \Noselect or
 
5665   \NonExistent is indicated, the name MUST also be valid as an argument
 
5666   for commands, such as SELECT, that accept mailbox names.
 
5668   The name might be followed by an OPTIONAL series of extended fields,
 
5669   a parenthesized list of tagged data (also referred to as an "extended
 
5670   data item").  The first element of an extended field is a string,
 
5671   which identifies the type of data.  [RFC5258] specifies requirements
 
5672   on string registration (which are called "tags"; such tags are not to
 
5673   be confused with IMAP command tags); in particular, it states that
 
5674   "Tags MUST be registered with IANA".  This document doesn't change
 
5675   that.  See Section 9.5 of [RFC5258] for the registration template.
 
5676   The server MAY return data in the extended fields that was not
 
5677   directly solicited by the client in the corresponding LIST command.
 
5678   For example, the client can enable extra extended fields by using
 
5679   another IMAP extension that makes use of the extended LIST responses.
 
5680   The client MUST ignore all extended fields it doesn't recognize.
 
5684     S: * LIST (\Noselect) "/" ~/Mail/foo
 
5688     S: * LIST (\Marked) ":" Tables (tablecloth (("edge" "lacy")
 
5689         ("color" "red")) Sample "text")
 
5690     S: * LIST () ":" Tables:new (tablecloth ("edge" "lacy")
 
5691         Sample ("text" "more text"))
 
56937.3.2.  NAMESPACE Response
 
5695   Contents:   the prefix and hierarchy delimiter to the server's
 
5696               Personal Namespace(s), Other Users' Namespace(s), and
 
5699   The NAMESPACE response occurs as a result of a NAMESPACE command.  It
 
5700   contains the prefix and hierarchy delimiter to the server's Personal
 
5701   Namespace(s), Other Users' Namespace(s), and Shared Namespace(s) that
 
5702   the server wishes to expose.  The response will contain a NIL for any
 
5703   namespace class that is not available.  The Namespace-Response-
 
5704   Extensions ABNF non-terminal is defined for extensibility and MAY be
 
5705   included in the response.
 
5709     S: * NAMESPACE (("" "/")) (("~" "/")) NIL
 
57117.3.3.  STATUS Response
 
5715               status parenthesized list
 
5717   The STATUS response occurs as a result of a STATUS command.  It
 
5718   returns the mailbox name that matches the STATUS specification and
 
5719   the requested mailbox status information.
 
5723     S: * STATUS blurdybloop (MESSAGES 231 UIDNEXT 44292)
 
57257.3.4.  ESEARCH Response
 
5727   Contents:   one or more search-return-data pairs
 
5729   The ESEARCH response occurs as a result of a SEARCH or UID SEARCH
 
5732   The ESEARCH response starts with an optional search correlator.  If
 
5733   it is missing, then the response was not caused by a particular IMAP
 
5734   command, whereas if it is present, it contains the tag of the command
 
5735   that caused the response to be returned.
 
5737   The search correlator is followed by an optional UID indicator.  If
 
5738   this indicator is present, all data in the ESEARCH response refers to
 
5739   UIDs; otherwise, all returned data refers to message numbers.
 
5741   The rest of the ESEARCH response contains one or more search data
 
5742   pairs.  Each pair starts with a unique return item name, followed by
 
5743   a space and the corresponding data.  Search data pairs may be
 
5744   returned in any order.  Unless otherwise specified by an extension,
 
5745   any return item name SHOULD appear only once in an ESEARCH response.
 
5747   This document specifies the following return item names:
 
5750      Returns the lowest message number/UID that satisfies the SEARCH
 
5753      If the SEARCH results in no matches, the server MUST NOT include
 
5754      the MIN return item in the ESEARCH response; however, it still
 
5755      MUST send the ESEARCH response.
 
5758      Returns the highest message number/UID that satisfies the SEARCH
 
5761      If the SEARCH results in no matches, the server MUST NOT include
 
5762      the MAX return item in the ESEARCH response; however, it still
 
5763      MUST send the ESEARCH response.
 
5766      Returns all message numbers/UIDs that satisfy the SEARCH criteria
 
5767      using the sequence-set syntax.  Each set MUST be complete; in
 
5768      particular, a UID set is returned in an ESEARCH response only when
 
5769      each number in the range corresponds to an existing (matching)
 
5770      message.  The client MUST NOT assume that messages/UIDs will be
 
5771      listed in any particular order.
 
5773      If the SEARCH results in no matches, the server MUST NOT include
 
5774      the ALL return item in the ESEARCH response; however, it still
 
5775      MUST send the ESEARCH response.
 
5778      Returns the number of messages that satisfy the SEARCH criteria.
 
5779      This return item MUST always be included in the ESEARCH response.
 
5783     S: * ESEARCH UID COUNT 17 ALL 4:18,21,28
 
5787     S: * ESEARCH (TAG "a567") UID COUNT 17 ALL 4:18,21,28
 
5791     S: * ESEARCH COUNT 18 ALL 1:17,21
 
57937.3.5.  FLAGS Response
 
5795   Contents:   flag parenthesized list
 
5797   The FLAGS response occurs as a result of a SELECT or EXAMINE command.
 
5798   The flag parenthesized list identifies the flags (at a minimum, the
 
5799   system-defined flags) that are applicable for this mailbox.  Flags
 
5800   other than the system flags can also exist, depending on server
 
5803   The update from the FLAGS response MUST be remembered by the client.
 
5807     S: * FLAGS (\Answered \Flagged \Deleted \Seen \Draft)
 
58097.4.  Server Responses - Mailbox Size
 
5811   These responses are always untagged.  This is how changes in the size
 
5812   of the mailbox are transmitted from the server to the client.
 
5813   Immediately following the "*" token is a number that represents a
 
58167.4.1.  EXISTS Response
 
5820   The EXISTS response reports the number of messages in the mailbox.
 
5821   This response occurs as a result of a SELECT or EXAMINE command and
 
5822   if the size of the mailbox changes (e.g., new messages).
 
5824   The update from the EXISTS response MUST be remembered by the client.
 
58307.5.  Server Responses - Message Status
 
5832   These responses are always untagged.  This is how message data are
 
5833   transmitted from the server to the client, often as a result of a
 
5834   command with the same name.  Immediately following the "*" token is a
 
5835   number that represents a message sequence number.
 
58377.5.1.  EXPUNGE Response
 
5841   The EXPUNGE response reports that the specified message sequence
 
5842   number has been permanently removed from the mailbox.  The message
 
5843   sequence number for each successive message in the mailbox is
 
5844   immediately decremented by 1, and this decrement is reflected in
 
5845   message sequence numbers in subsequent responses (including other
 
5846   untagged EXPUNGE responses).
 
5848   The EXPUNGE response also decrements the number of messages in the
 
5849   mailbox; it is not necessary to send an EXISTS response with the new
 
5852   As a result of the immediate decrement rule, message sequence numbers
 
5853   that appear in a set of successive EXPUNGE responses depend upon
 
5854   whether the messages are removed starting from lower numbers to
 
5855   higher numbers, or from higher numbers to lower numbers.  For
 
5856   example, if the last 5 messages in a 9-message mailbox are expunged,
 
5857   a "lower to higher" server will send five untagged EXPUNGE responses
 
5858   for message sequence number 5, whereas a "higher to lower" server
 
5859   will send successive untagged EXPUNGE responses for message sequence
 
5860   numbers 9, 8, 7, 6, and 5.
 
5863   nor while responding to a FETCH, STORE, or SEARCH command.  This rule
 
5864   is necessary to prevent a loss of synchronization of message sequence
 
5865   numbers between client and server.  A command is not "in progress"
 
5866   until the complete command has been received; in particular, a
 
5867   command is not "in progress" during the negotiation of command
 
5870      Note: UID FETCH, UID STORE, and UID SEARCH are different commands
 
5871      from FETCH, STORE, and SEARCH.  An EXPUNGE response MAY be sent
 
5872      during a UID command.
 
5874   The update from the EXPUNGE response MUST be remembered by the
 
58817.5.2.  FETCH Response
 
5883   Contents:   message data
 
5885   The FETCH response returns data about a message to the client.  The
 
5886   data are pairs of data item names, and their values are in
 
5887   parentheses.  This response occurs as the result of a FETCH or STORE
 
5888   command, as well as by a unilateral server decision (e.g., flag
 
5891   The current data items are:
 
5893   BINARY[<section-binary>]<<number>>
 
5894      An <nstring> or <literal8> expressing the content of the specified
 
5895      section after removing any encoding specified in the corresponding
 
5896      Content-Transfer-Encoding header field.  If <number> is present,
 
5897      it refers to the offset within the DECODED section data.
 
5899      If the domain of the decoded data is "8bit" and the data does not
 
5900      contain the NUL octet, the server SHOULD return the data in a
 
5901      <string> instead of a <literal8>; this allows the client to
 
5902      determine if the "8bit" data contains the NUL octet without having
 
5903      to explicitly scan the data stream for NULs.
 
5905      Messaging clients and servers have been notoriously lax in their
 
5906      adherence to the Internet CRLF convention for terminating lines of
 
5907      textual data (text/* media types) in Internet protocols.  When
 
5908      sending data in a BINARY[...] FETCH data item, servers MUST ensure
 
5909      that textual line-oriented sections are always transmitted using
 
5910      the IMAP CRLF line termination syntax, regardless of the
 
5911      underlying storage representation of the data on the server.
 
5914      Transfer-Encoding, it MUST fail the request and issue a "NO"
 
5915      response that contains the "UNKNOWN-CTE" response code.
 
5917   BINARY.SIZE[<section-binary>]
 
5918      The size of the section after removing any encoding specified in
 
5919      the corresponding Content-Transfer-Encoding header field.  The
 
5920      value returned MUST match the size of the <nstring> or <literal8>
 
5921      that will be returned by the corresponding FETCH BINARY request.
 
5923      If the server does not know how to decode the section's Content-
 
5924      Transfer-Encoding, it MUST fail the request and issue a "NO"
 
5925      response that contains the "UNKNOWN-CTE" response code.
 
5928      A form of BODYSTRUCTURE without extension data.
 
5930   BODY[<section>]<<origin octet>>
 
5931      A string expressing the body contents of the specified section.
 
5932      The string SHOULD be interpreted by the client according to the
 
5933      content transfer encoding, body type, and subtype.
 
5935      If the origin octet is specified, this string is a substring of
 
5936      the entire body contents, starting at that origin octet.  This
 
5937      means that BODY[]<0> MAY be truncated, but BODY[] is NEVER
 
5940         Note: The origin octet facility MUST NOT be used by a server in
 
5941         a FETCH response unless the client specifically requested it by
 
5942         means of a FETCH of a BODY[<section>]<<partial>> data item.
 
5944      8-bit textual data is permitted if a [CHARSET] identifier is part
 
5945      of the body parameter parenthesized list for this section.  Note
 
5946      that headers (part specifiers HEADER or MIME, or the header
 
5947      portion of a MESSAGE/RFC822 or MESSAGE/GLOBAL part) MAY be in UTF-
 
5948      8.  Note also that the [RFC5322] delimiting blank line between the
 
5949      header and the body is not affected by header-line subsetting; the
 
5950      blank line is always included as part of the header data, except
 
5951      in the case of a message that has no body and no blank line.
 
5953      Non-textual data such as binary data MUST be transfer encoded into
 
5954      a textual form, such as base64, prior to being sent to the client.
 
5955      To derive the original binary data, the client MUST decode the
 
5956      transfer-encoded string.
 
5959      A parenthesized list that describes the [MIME-IMB] body structure
 
5960      of a message.  This is computed by the server by parsing the
 
5961      [MIME-IMB] header fields, defaulting various fields as necessary.
 
5963      For example, a simple text message of 48 lines and 2279 octets can
 
5964      have a body structure of:
 
5966         ("TEXT" "PLAIN" ("CHARSET" "US-ASCII") NIL NIL "7BIT" 2279 48)
 
5968      Multiple parts are indicated by parenthesis nesting.  Instead of a
 
5969      body type as the first element of the parenthesized list, there is
 
5970      a sequence of one or more nested body structures.  The second
 
5971      element of the parenthesized list is the multipart subtype (mixed,
 
5972      digest, parallel, alternative, etc.).
 
5974      For example, a two-part message consisting of a text and a
 
5975      base64-encoded text attachment can have a body structure of:
 
5978         (("TEXT" "PLAIN" ("CHARSET" "US-ASCII") NIL NIL "7BIT" 1152 23)
 
5979          ("TEXT" "PLAIN" ("CHARSET" "US-ASCII" "NAME" "cc.diff")
 
5980          "<960723163407.20117h@cac.washington.edu>" "Compiler diff"
 
5981          "BASE64" 4554 73) "MIXED")
 
5983      Extension data follows the multipart subtype.  Extension data is
 
5984      never returned with the BODY fetch but can be returned with a
 
5985      BODYSTRUCTURE fetch.  Extension data, if present, MUST be in the
 
5986      defined order.  The extension data of a multipart body part are in
 
5987      the following order:
 
5989   body parameter parenthesized list
 
5990      A parenthesized list of attribute/value pairs (e.g., ("foo" "bar"
 
5991      "baz" "rag") where "bar" is the value of "foo", and "rag" is the
 
5992      value of "baz") as defined in [MIME-IMB].  Servers SHOULD decode
 
5993      parameter-value continuations and parameter-value character sets
 
5994      as described in [RFC2231], for example, if the message contains
 
5995      parameters "baz*0", "baz*1", and "baz*2", the server should decode
 
5996      them per [RFC2231], concatenate, and return the resulting value as
 
5997      a parameter "baz".  Similarly, if the message contains parameters
 
5998      "foo*0*" and "foo*1*", the server should decode them per
 
5999      [RFC2231], convert to UTF-8, concatenate, and return the resulting
 
6000      value as a parameter "foo*".
 
6003      A parenthesized list, consisting of a disposition type string,
 
6004      followed by a parenthesized list of disposition attribute/value
 
6005      pairs as defined in [DISPOSITION].  Servers SHOULD decode
 
6006      parameter-value continuations as described in [RFC2231].
 
6009      A string or parenthesized list giving the body language value as
 
6010      defined in [LANGUAGE-TAGS].
 
6013      A string giving the body content URI as defined in [LOCATION].
 
6015      Any following extension data are not yet defined in this version
 
6016      of the protocol.  Such extension data can consist of zero or more
 
6017      NILs, strings, numbers, or potentially nested parenthesized lists
 
6018      of such data.  Client implementations that do a BODYSTRUCTURE
 
6019      fetch MUST be prepared to accept such extension data.  Server
 
6020      implementations MUST NOT send such extension data until it has
 
6021      been defined by a revision of this protocol.
 
6023      The basic fields of a non-multipart body part are in the following
 
6027      A string giving the content media-type name as defined in
 
6031      A string giving the content subtype name as defined in [MIME-IMB].
 
6033   body parameter parenthesized list
 
6034      A parenthesized list of attribute/value pairs (e.g., ("foo" "bar"
 
6035      "baz" "rag") where "bar" is the value of "foo", and "rag" is the
 
6036      value of "baz") as defined in [MIME-IMB].
 
6039      A string giving the Content-ID header field value as defined in
 
6040      Section 7 of [MIME-IMB].
 
6043      A string giving the Content-Description header field value as
 
6044      defined in Section 8 of [MIME-IMB].
 
6047      A string giving the content transfer encoding as defined in
 
6048      Section 6 of [MIME-IMB].
 
6051      A number giving the size of the body in octets.  Note that this
 
6052      size is the size in its transfer encoding and not the resulting
 
6053      size after any decoding.
 
6055      A body type of type MESSAGE and subtype RFC822 contains,
 
6056      immediately after the basic fields, the envelope structure, body
 
6057      structure, and size in text lines of the encapsulated message.
 
6059      A body type of type TEXT contains, immediately after the basic
 
6060      fields, the size of the body in text lines.  Note that this size
 
6061      is the size in its content transfer encoding and not the resulting
 
6062      size after any decoding.
 
6064      Extension data follows the basic fields and the type-specific
 
6065      fields listed above.  Extension data is never returned with the
 
6066      BODY fetch but can be returned with a BODYSTRUCTURE fetch.
 
6067      Extension data, if present, MUST be in the defined order.
 
6069      The extension data of a non-multipart body part are in the
 
6073      A string giving the body MD5 value as defined in [MD5].
 
6076      A parenthesized list with the same content and function as the
 
6077      body disposition for a multipart body part.
 
6080      A string or parenthesized list giving the body language value as
 
6081      defined in [LANGUAGE-TAGS].
 
6084      A string giving the body content URI as defined in [LOCATION].
 
6086      Any following extension data are not yet defined in this version
 
6087      of the protocol and would be as described above under multipart
 
6091      A parenthesized list that describes the envelope structure of a
 
6092      message.  This is computed by the server by parsing the [RFC5322]
 
6093      header into the component parts, defaulting various fields as
 
6096      The fields of the envelope structure are in the following order:
 
6097      date, subject, from, sender, reply-to, to, cc, bcc, in-reply-to,
 
6098      and message-id.  The date, subject, in-reply-to, and message-id
 
6099      fields are strings.  The from, sender, reply-to, to, cc, and bcc
 
6100      fields are parenthesized lists of address structures.
 
6102      An address structure is a parenthesized list that describes an
 
6103      electronic mail address.  The fields of an address structure are
 
6104      in the following order: display name, [SMTP] at-domain-list
 
6105      (source route and obs-route ABNF production from [RFC5322]),
 
6106      mailbox name (local-part ABNF production from [RFC5322]), and
 
6109      [RFC5322] group syntax is indicated by a special form of address
 
6110      structure in which the hostname field is NIL.  If the mailbox name
 
6111      field is also NIL, this is an end-of-group marker (semicolon in
 
6112      RFC 822 syntax).  If the mailbox name field is non-NIL, this is
 
6113      the start of a group marker, and the mailbox name field holds the
 
6116      If the Date, Subject, In-Reply-To, and Message-ID header fields
 
6117      are absent in the [RFC5322] header, the corresponding member of
 
6118      the envelope is NIL; if these header fields are present but empty,
 
6119      the corresponding member of the envelope is the empty string.
 
6121         Note: some servers may return a NIL envelope member in the
 
6122         "present but empty" case.  Clients SHOULD treat NIL and the
 
6123         empty string as identical.
 
6125         Note: [RFC5322] requires that all messages have a valid Date
 
6126         header field.  Therefore, for a well-formed message, the date
 
6127         member in the envelope cannot be NIL or the empty string.
 
6128         However, it can be NIL for a malformed or draft message.
 
6130         Note: [RFC5322] requires that the In-Reply-To and Message-ID
 
6131         header fields, if present, have non-empty content.  Therefore,
 
6132         for a well-formed message, the in-reply-to and message-id
 
6133         members in the envelope cannot be the empty string.  However,
 
6134         they can still be the empty string for a malformed message.
 
6136      If the From, To, Cc, and Bcc header fields are absent in the
 
6137      [RFC5322] header, or are present but empty, the corresponding
 
6138      member of the envelope is NIL.
 
6141      [RFC5322] header, or are present but empty, the server sets the
 
6142      corresponding member of the envelope to be the same value as the
 
6143      from member (the client is not expected to know how to do this).
 
6145         Note: [RFC5322] requires that all messages have a valid From
 
6146         header field.  Therefore, for a well-formed message, the from,
 
6147         sender, and reply-to members in the envelope cannot be NIL.
 
6148         However, they can be NIL for a malformed or draft message.
 
6151      A parenthesized list of flags that are set for this message.
 
6154      A string representing the internal date of the message.
 
6157      A number expressing the size of a message, as described in
 
6161      A number expressing the unique identifier of the message.
 
6163   If the server chooses to send unsolicited FETCH responses, they MUST
 
6164   include UID FETCH item.  Note that this is a new requirement when
 
6165   compared to [RFC3501].
 
6169     S: * 23 FETCH (FLAGS (\Seen) RFC822.SIZE 44827 UID 447)
 
61717.6.  Server Responses - Command Continuation Request
 
6173   The command continuation request response is indicated by a "+" token
 
6174   instead of a tag.  This form of response indicates that the server is
 
6175   ready to accept the continuation of a command from the client.  The
 
6176   remainder of this response is a line of text.
 
6178   This response is used in the AUTHENTICATE command to transmit server
 
6179   data to the client and request additional client data.  This response
 
6180   is also used if an argument to any command is a synchronizing
 
6183   The client is not permitted to send the octets of the synchronizing
 
6184   literal unless the server indicates that it is expected.  This
 
6185   permits the server to process commands and reject errors on a line-
 
6186   by-line basis.  The remainder of the command, including the CRLF that
 
6187   terminates a command, follows the octets of the literal.  If there
 
6188   are any additional command arguments, the literal octets are followed
 
6189   by a space and those arguments.
 
6194     S: + Ready for additional command text
 
6196     S: + Ready for additional command text
 
6198     S: A001 OK LOGIN completed
 
6199     C: A044 BLURDYBLOOP {102856}
 
6200     S: A044 BAD No such command as "BLURDYBLOOP"
 
62028.  Sample IMAP4rev2 Connection
 
6204   The following is a transcript of an IMAP4rev2 connection on a non-TLS
 
6205   port.  A long line in this sample is broken for editorial clarity.
 
6207   S:   * OK [CAPABILITY STARTTLS AUTH=SCRAM-SHA-256 LOGINDISABLED
 
6208         IMAP4rev2] IMAP4rev2 Service Ready
 
6210   S:   a000 OK Proceed with TLS negotiation
 
6212   C:   A001 AUTHENTICATE SCRAM-SHA-256
 
6213         biwsbj11c2VyLHI9ck9wck5HZndFYmVSV2diTkVrcU8=
 
6214   S:   + cj1yT3ByTkdmd0ViZVJXZ2JORWtxTyVodllEcFdVYTJSYVRDQWZ1eEZJbGopaE
 
6215        5sRiRrMCxzPVcyMlphSjBTTlk3c29Fc1VFamI2Z1E9PSxpPTQwOTY=
 
6216   C:   Yz1iaXdzLHI9ck9wck5HZndFYmVSV2diTkVrcU8laHZZRHBXVWEyUmFUQ0FmdXhG
 
6217        SWxqKWhObEYkazAscD1kSHpiWmFwV0lrNGpVaE4rVXRlOXl0YWc5empmTUhnc3Ft
 
6219   S:   + dj02cnJpVFJCaTIzV3BSUi93dHVwK21NaFVaVW4vZEI1bkxUSlJzamw5NUc0
 
6222   S:   A001 OK SCRAM-SHA-256 authentication successful
 
6223   C:   babc ENABLE IMAP4rev2
 
6224   S:   * ENABLED IMAP4rev2
 
6225   S:   babc OK Some capabilities enabled
 
6226   C:   a002 select inbox
 
6228   S:   * FLAGS (\Answered \Flagged \Deleted \Seen \Draft)
 
6229   S:   * OK [UIDVALIDITY 3857529045] UIDs valid
 
6230   S:   * LIST () "/" INBOX ("OLDNAME" ("inbox"))
 
6231   S:   a002 OK [READ-WRITE] SELECT completed
 
6232   C:   a003 fetch 12 full
 
6233   S:   * 12 FETCH (FLAGS (\Seen) INTERNALDATE
 
6234         "17-Jul-1996 02:44:25 -0700" RFC822.SIZE 4286 ENVELOPE (
 
6235         "Wed, 17 Jul 1996 02:23:25 -0700 (PDT)"
 
6236         "IMAP4rev2 WG mtg summary and minutes"
 
6237         (("Terry Gray" NIL "gray" "cac.washington.edu"))
 
6238         (("Terry Gray" NIL "gray" "cac.washington.edu"))
 
6239         (("Terry Gray" NIL "gray" "cac.washington.edu"))
 
6240         ((NIL NIL "imap" "cac.washington.edu"))
 
6241         ((NIL NIL "minutes" "CNRI.Reston.VA.US")
 
6242         ("John Klensin" NIL "KLENSIN" "MIT.EDU")) NIL NIL
 
6243         "<B27397-0100000@cac.washington.ed>")
 
6244         BODY ("TEXT" "PLAIN" ("CHARSET" "US-ASCII") NIL NIL "7BIT"
 
6246   S:    a003 OK FETCH completed
 
6247   C:    a004 fetch 12 body[header]
 
6248   S:    * 12 FETCH (BODY[HEADER] {342}
 
6249   S:    Date: Wed, 17 Jul 1996 02:23:25 -0700 (PDT)
 
6250   S:    From: Terry Gray <gray@cac.washington.edu>
 
6251   S:    Subject: IMAP4rev2 WG mtg summary and minutes
 
6252   S:    To: imap@cac.washington.edu
 
6253   S:    cc: minutes@CNRI.Reston.VA.US, John Klensin <KLENSIN@MIT.EDU>
 
6254   S:    Message-Id: <B27397-0100000@cac.washington.edu>
 
6255   S:    MIME-Version: 1.0
 
6256   S:    Content-Type: TEXT/PLAIN; CHARSET=US-ASCII
 
6259   S:    a004 OK FETCH completed
 
6260   C:    a005 store 12 +flags \deleted
 
6261   S:    * 12 FETCH (FLAGS (\Seen \Deleted))
 
6262   S:    a005 OK +FLAGS completed
 
6264   S:    * BYE IMAP4rev2 server terminating connection
 
6265   S:    a006 OK LOGOUT completed
 
6269   The following syntax specification uses the Augmented Backus-Naur
 
6270   Form (ABNF) notation as specified in [ABNF].
 
6272   In the case of alternative or optional rules in which a later rule
 
6273   overlaps an earlier rule, the rule that is listed earlier MUST take
 
6274   priority.  For example, "\Seen" when parsed as a flag is the \Seen
 
6275   flag name and not a flag-extension, even though "\Seen" can be parsed
 
6276   as a flag-extension.  Some, but not all, instances of this rule are
 
6279     Note: [ABNF] rules MUST be followed strictly; in particular:
 
6281   1.  Unless otherwise noted, all alphabetic characters are case
 
6282       insensitive.  The use of uppercase or lowercase characters to
 
6283       define token strings is for editorial clarity only.
 
6284       Implementations MUST accept these strings in a case-insensitive
 
6287   2.  In all cases, SP refers to exactly one space.  It is NOT
 
6288       permitted to substitute TAB, insert additional spaces, or
 
6289       otherwise treat SP as being equivalent to linear whitespace
 
6292   3.  The ASCII NUL character, %x00, MUST NOT be used anywhere, with
 
6293       the exception of the OCTET production.
 
6295   SP              = <Defined in RFC 5234>
 
6296   CTL             = <Defined in RFC 5234>
 
6297   CRLF            = <Defined in RFC 5234>
 
6298   ALPHA           = <Defined in RFC 5234>
 
6299   DIGIT           = <Defined in RFC 5234>
 
6300   DQUOTE          = <Defined in RFC 5234>
 
6301   OCTET           = <Defined in RFC 5234>
 
6307                       ; Holds route from [RFC5322] obs-route if
 
6311                       ; NIL indicates [RFC5322] group syntax.
 
6312                       ; Otherwise, holds [RFC5322] domain name
 
6314   addr-mailbox    = nstring
 
6315                       ; NIL indicates end of [RFC5322] group; if
 
6316                       ; non-NIL and addr-host is NIL, holds
 
6317                       ; [RFC5322] group name.
 
6318                       ; Otherwise, holds [RFC5322] local-part
 
6319                       ; after removing [RFC5322] quoting
 
6322                       ; If non-NIL, holds phrase from [RFC5322]
 
6323                       ; mailbox after removing [RFC5322] quoting
 
6328   append-uid      = uniqueid
 
6330   astring         = 1*ASTRING-CHAR / string
 
6332   ASTRING-CHAR   = ATOM-CHAR / resp-specials
 
6336   ATOM-CHAR       = <any CHAR except atom-specials>
 
6338   atom-specials   = "(" / ")" / "{" / SP / CTL / list-wildcards /
 
6339                     quoted-specials / resp-specials
 
6345                       ; Authentication mechanism name, as defined by
 
6346                       ; [SASL], Section 7.1
 
6348   base64          = *(4base64-char) [base64-terminal]
 
6350   base64-char     = ALPHA / DIGIT / "+" / "/"
 
6353   base64-terminal = (2base64-char "==") / (3base64-char "=")
 
6357   body-extension  = nstring / number / number64 /
 
6358                      "(" body-extension *(SP body-extension) ")"
 
6359                       ; Future expansion.  Client implementations
 
6360                       ; MUST accept body-extension fields.  Server
 
6361                       ; implementations MUST NOT generate
 
6362                       ; body-extension fields except as defined by
 
6363                       ; future Standard or Standards Track
 
6364                       ; revisions of this specification.
 
6366   body-ext-1part  = body-fld-md5 [SP body-fld-dsp [SP body-fld-lang
 
6367                     [SP body-fld-loc *(SP body-extension)]]]
 
6368                       ; MUST NOT be returned on non-extensible
 
6371   body-ext-mpart  = body-fld-param [SP body-fld-dsp [SP body-fld-lang
 
6372                     [SP body-fld-loc *(SP body-extension)]]]
 
6373                       ; MUST NOT be returned on non-extensible
 
6377                     body-fld-enc SP body-fld-octets
 
6379   body-fld-desc   = nstring
 
6381   body-fld-dsp    = "(" string SP body-fld-param ")" / nil
 
6383   body-fld-enc    = (DQUOTE ("7BIT" / "8BIT" / "BINARY" / "BASE64"/
 
6384                     "QUOTED-PRINTABLE") DQUOTE) / string
 
6385                     ; Content-Transfer-Encoding header field value.
 
6386                     ; Defaults to "7BIT" (as per RFC 2045)
 
6387                     ; if not present in the body part.
 
6389   body-fld-id     = nstring
 
6391   body-fld-lang   = nstring / "(" string *(SP string) ")"
 
6393   body-fld-loc    = nstring
 
6395   body-fld-lines  = number64
 
6397   body-fld-md5    = nstring
 
6399   body-fld-octets = number
 
6408                       ; MESSAGE subtype MUST NOT be "RFC822" or
 
6413                       ; MULTIPART body part
 
6416                     SP body SP body-fld-lines
 
6420   capability      = ("AUTH=" auth-type) / atom
 
6421                       ; New capabilities SHOULD be
 
6422                       ; registered with IANA using the
 
6423                       ; RFC Required policy, i.e., in
 
6424                       ; a Standards Track, an Experimental,
 
6425                       ; or an Informational RFC.
 
6429                       ; See Section 6.1.1 for information about
 
6430                       ; required security-related capabilities.
 
6431                       ; Servers that offer RFC 1730 compatibility MUST
 
6432                       ; list "IMAP4" as the first capability.
 
6433                       ; Servers that offer RFC 3501 compatibility MUST
 
6434                       ; list "IMAP4rev1" as one of the capabilities.
 
6436   CHAR            = <defined in [ABNF]>
 
6439                       ; any OCTET except NUL, %x00
 
6443   childinfo-extended-item =  "CHILDINFO" SP "("
 
6444               list-select-base-opt-quoted
 
6445               *(SP list-select-base-opt-quoted) ")"
 
6446               ; Extended data item (mbox-list-extended-item)
 
6447               ; returned when the RECURSIVEMATCH
 
6448               ; selection option is specified.
 
6449               ; Note 1: the CHILDINFO extended data item tag can be
 
6450               ; returned with or without surrounding quotes, as per
 
6451               ; mbox-list-extended-item-tag production.
 
6452               ; Note 2: The selection options are always returned
 
6453               ; quoted, unlike their specification in
 
6454               ; the extended LIST command.
 
6456   child-mbox-flag =  "\HasChildren" / "\HasNoChildren"
 
6457               ; attributes for the CHILDREN return option, at most
 
6458               ; one possible per LIST response
 
6460   command         = tag SP (command-any / command-auth /
 
6461                     command-nonauth / command-select) CRLF
 
6462                       ; Modal based on state
 
6465                       ; Valid in all states
 
6467   command-auth    = append / create / delete / enable / examine /
 
6468                     list / namespace-command / rename /
 
6469                     select / status / subscribe / unsubscribe /
 
6471                       ; Valid only in Authenticated or Selected state
 
6474                       ; Valid only when in Not Authenticated state
 
6477                      move / fetch / store / search / uid
 
6478                       ; Valid only when in Selected state
 
6480   continue-req    = "+" SP (resp-text / base64) CRLF
 
6485                       ; Use of INBOX gives a NO error
 
6493                       ; Fixed-format version of date-day
 
6496                     "Jul" / "Aug" / "Sep" / "Oct" / "Nov" / "Dec"
 
6498   date-text       = date-day "-" date-month "-" date-year
 
6503                     SP time SP zone DQUOTE
 
6506                       ; Use of INBOX gives a NO error
 
6511   eitem-standard-tag =  atom
 
6512               ; a tag for LIST extended data item defined in a Standard
 
6513               ; Track or Experimental RFC.
 
6515   eitem-vendor-tag =  vendor-token "-" atom
 
6516               ; a vendor-specific tag for LIST extended data item
 
6523                     env-sender SP env-reply-to SP env-to SP env-cc SP
 
6524                     env-bcc SP env-in-reply-to SP env-message-id ")"
 
6528   env-cc          = "(" 1*address ")" / nil
 
6532   env-from        = "(" 1*address ")" / nil
 
6534   env-in-reply-to = nstring
 
6536   env-message-id  = nstring
 
6538   env-reply-to    = "(" 1*address ")" / nil
 
6540   env-sender      = "(" 1*address ")" / nil
 
6542   env-subject     = nstring
 
6544   env-to          = "(" 1*address ")" / nil
 
6547                       *(SP search-return-data)
 
6548                     ; ESEARCH response replaces SEARCH response
 
6554                     "ALL" / "FULL" / "FAST" /
 
6555                     fetch-att / "(" fetch-att *(SP fetch-att) ")")
 
6559                     "BODY" ["STRUCTURE"] / "UID" /
 
6560                     "BODY" section [partial] /
 
6561                     "BODY.PEEK" section [partial] /
 
6562                     "BINARY" [".PEEK"] section-binary [partial] /
 
6563                     "BINARY.SIZE" section-binary
 
6566                     "\Seen" / "\Draft" / flag-keyword / flag-extension
 
6567                       ; Does not include "\Recent"
 
6569   flag-extension  = "\" atom
 
6570                       ; Future expansion.  Client implementations
 
6571                       ; MUST accept flag-extension flags.  Server
 
6572                       ; implementations MUST NOT generate
 
6573                       ; flag-extension flags except as defined by
 
6574                       ; a future Standard or Standards Track
 
6575                       ; revisions of this specification.
 
6576                       ; "\Recent" was defined in RFC 3501
 
6577                       ; and is now deprecated.
 
6579   flag-fetch      = flag / obsolete-flag-recent
 
6581   flag-keyword    = "$MDNSent" / "$Forwarded" / "$Junk" /
 
6582                     "$NotJunk" / "$Phishing" / atom
 
6586   flag-perm       = flag / "\*"
 
6588   greeting        = "*" SP (resp-cond-auth / resp-cond-bye) CRLF
 
6590   header-fld-name = astring
 
6592   header-list     = "(" header-fld-name *(SP header-fld-name) ")"
 
6596   initial-resp    =  (base64 / "=")
 
6597                      ; "initial response" defined in
 
6598                      ; Section 4 of [SASL]
 
6601                     mailbox SP mbox-or-pat
 
6602                     [SP list-return-opts]
 
6607   list-char       = ATOM-CHAR / list-wildcards / resp-specials
 
6609   list-return-opt   =  return-option
 
6610                        ; Note that return-option is the ABNF
 
6611                        ; non-terminal used by RFC 5258
 
6614               "(" [list-return-opt *(SP list-return-opt)] ")"
 
6615               ; list return options, e.g., CHILDREN
 
6617   list-select-base-opt =  "SUBSCRIBED" / option-extension
 
6618               ; options that can be used by themselves
 
6620   list-select-base-opt-quoted =  DQUOTE list-select-base-opt DQUOTE
 
6622   list-select-independent-opt =  "REMOTE" / option-extension
 
6623               ; options that do not syntactically interact with
 
6626   list-select-mod-opt =  "RECURSIVEMATCH" / option-extension
 
6627               ; options that require a list-select-base-opt
 
6628               ; to also be present
 
6630   list-select-opt =  list-select-base-opt / list-select-independent-opt
 
6631                      / list-select-mod-opt
 
6634                      (*(list-select-opt SP) list-select-base-opt
 
6635                      *(SP list-select-opt))
 
6636                     / (list-select-independent-opt
 
6637                      *(SP list-select-independent-opt))
 
6639               ; Any number of options may be in any order.
 
6641               ; list-select-base-opt must also appear.
 
6642               ; This allows these:
 
6646               ; (SUBSCRIBED REMOTE)
 
6647               ; (SUBSCRIBED RECURSIVEMATCH)
 
6648               ; (SUBSCRIBED REMOTE RECURSIVEMATCH)
 
6649               ; But does NOT allow these:
 
6651               ; (REMOTE RECURSIVEMATCH)
 
6653   list-wildcards  = "%" / "*"
 
6656                       ; <number64> represents the number of CHAR8s.
 
6657                       ; A non-synchronizing literal is distinguished
 
6658                       ; from a synchronizing literal by the presence of
 
6659                       ; "+" before the closing "}".
 
6660                       ; Non-synchronizing literals are not allowed when
 
6661                       ; sent from server to the client.
 
6663   literal8        =  "~{" number64 "}" CRLF *OCTET
 
6664                       ; <number64> represents the number of OCTETs
 
6665                       ; in the response string.
 
6669   mailbox         = "INBOX" / astring
 
6670                       ; INBOX is case insensitive.  All case variants
 
6671                       ; of INBOX (e.g., "iNbOx") MUST be interpreted as
 
6672                       ; INBOX, not as an astring.  An astring that
 
6673                       ; consists of the case-insensitive sequence
 
6674                       ; "I" "N" "B" "O" "X" is considered
 
6675                       ; to be an INBOX and not an astring.
 
6676                       ; Refer to Section 5.1 for further
 
6677                       ; semantic details of mailbox names.
 
6679   mailbox-data    =  "FLAGS" SP flag-list / "LIST" SP mailbox-list /
 
6682                      number SP "EXISTS" / namespace-response /
 
6683                      obsolete-search-response /
 
6684                      obsolete-recent-response
 
6685                       ; obsolete-search-response and
 
6686                       ; obsolete-recent-response can only be returned
 
6687                       ; by servers that support both IMAPrev1
 
6691                      (DQUOTE QUOTED-CHAR DQUOTE / nil) SP mailbox
 
6692                      [SP mbox-list-extended]
 
6693               ; This is the list information pointed to by the ABNF
 
6694               ; item "mailbox-data", which is defined above
 
6696   mbox-list-extended =  "(" [mbox-list-extended-item
 
6697                         *(SP mbox-list-extended-item)] ")"
 
6702   mbox-list-extended-item-tag = astring
 
6703                  ; The content MUST conform to either
 
6704                  ; "eitem-vendor-tag" or "eitem-standard-tag"
 
6709   mbx-list-flags  = *(mbx-list-oflag SP) mbx-list-sflag
 
6710                     *(SP mbx-list-oflag) /
 
6711                     mbx-list-oflag *(SP mbx-list-oflag)
 
6713   mbx-list-oflag  = "\Noinferiors" / child-mbox-flag /
 
6714                     "\Subscribed" / "\Remote" / flag-extension
 
6715                  ; Other flags; multiple from this list are
 
6716                  ; possible per LIST response, but each flag
 
6717                  ; can only appear once per LIST response
 
6719   mbx-list-sflag  = "\NonExistent" / "\Noselect" / "\Marked" /
 
6721                  ; Selectability flags; only one per LIST response
 
6724                     "FONT" / "MESSAGE" / "MODEL" / "VIDEO" ) DQUOTE)
 
6727                       ; FONT defined in [RFC8081].
 
6728                       ; MODEL defined in [RFC2077].
 
6729                       ; Other top-level media types
 
6730                       ; are defined in [MIME-IMT].
 
6733                     DQUOTE ("RFC822" / "GLOBAL") DQUOTE
 
6734                       ; Defined in [MIME-IMT]
 
6736   media-subtype   = string
 
6737                       ; Defined in [MIME-IMT]
 
6740                       ; Defined in [MIME-IMT]
 
6747                      *(SP (msg-att-dynamic / msg-att-static)) ")"
 
6750                       ; MAY change for a message
 
6752   msg-att-static  = "ENVELOPE" SP envelope /
 
6754                     "RFC822.SIZE" SP number64 /
 
6755                     "BODY" ["STRUCTURE"] SP body /
 
6758                     "BINARY.SIZE" section-binary SP number /
 
6760                       ; MUST NOT change for a message
 
6762   name-component  = 1*UTF8-CHAR
 
6763                       ; MUST NOT contain ".", "/", "%", or "*"
 
6770                          (DQUOTE QUOTED-CHAR DQUOTE / nil)
 
6771                           [namespace-response-extensions] ")"
 
6775   namespace-response-extension = SP string SP
 
6776                     "(" string *(SP string) ")"
 
6779                         SP namespace SP namespace
 
6780                    ; The first Namespace is the Personal Namespace(s).
 
6781                    ; The second Namespace is the Other Users'
 
6783                    ; The third Namespace is the Shared Namespace(s).
 
6787   nstring         = string / nil
 
6790                       ; Unsigned 32-bit integer
 
6791                       ; (0 <= n < 4,294,967,296)
 
6795                       ; (0 <= n <= 9,223,372,036,854,775,807)
 
6797   nz-number       = digit-nz *DIGIT
 
6798                       ; Non-zero unsigned 32-bit integer
 
6799                       ; (0 < n < 4,294,967,296)
 
6801   nz-number64     = digit-nz *DIGIT
 
6802                       ; Unsigned 63-bit integer
 
6803                       ; (0 < n <= 9,223,372,036,854,775,807)
 
6805   obsolete-flag-recent = "\Recent"
 
6807   obsolete-recent-response = number SP "RECENT"
 
6812                       ; Extended data item (mbox-list-extended-item)
 
6813                       ; returned in a LIST response when a mailbox is
 
6814                       ; renamed or deleted. Also returned when
 
6815                       ; the server canonicalized the provided mailbox
 
6817                       ; Note 1: the OLDNAME tag can be returned
 
6818                       ; with or without surrounding quotes, as per
 
6819                       ; mbox-list-extended-item-tag production.
 
6824   option-standard-tag =  atom
 
6825                  ; an option defined in a Standards Track or
 
6828   option-val-comp =  astring /
 
6829                      option-val-comp *(SP option-val-comp) /
 
6830                      "(" option-val-comp ")"
 
6832   option-value =  "(" option-val-comp ")"
 
6834   option-vendor-tag =  vendor-token "-" atom
 
6835                  ; a vendor-specific option, non-standard
 
6837   partial-range    = number64 ["." nz-number64]
 
6838                       ; Copied from RFC 5092 (IMAP URL)
 
6839                       ; and updated to support 64-bit sizes.
 
6842                       ; Partial FETCH request. 0-based offset of
 
6843                       ; the first octet, followed by the number of
 
6844                       ; octets in the fragment.
 
6849                     ; [RFC5258] supports multiple patterns,
 
6850                     ; but this document only requires one
 
6852                     ; If the server is also implementing
 
6853                     ; [RFC5258], the "patterns" syntax from
 
6854                     ; that document must be followed.
 
6858   QUOTED-CHAR     = <any TEXT-CHAR except quoted-specials> /
 
6859                     "\" quoted-specials / UTF8-2 / UTF8-3 / UTF8-4
 
6861   quoted-specials = DQUOTE / "\"
 
6864                       ; Use of INBOX as a destination gives a NO error
 
6866   response        = *(continue-req / response-data) response-done
 
6869                     mailbox-data / message-data / capability-data /
 
6872   response-done   = response-tagged / response-fatal
 
6874   response-fatal  = "*" SP resp-cond-bye CRLF
 
6875                       ; Server closes connection immediately
 
6877   response-tagged = tag SP resp-cond-state CRLF
 
6879   resp-code-apnd  = "APPENDUID" SP nz-number SP append-uid
 
6883   resp-cond-auth  = ("OK" / "PREAUTH") SP resp-text
 
6884                       ; Authentication condition
 
6888   resp-cond-state = ("OK" / "NO" / "BAD") SP resp-text
 
6893   resp-text       = ["[" resp-text-code "]" SP] [text]
 
6896                     "BADCHARSET" [SP "(" charset *(SP charset) ")" ] /
 
6897                     capability-data / "PARSE" /
 
6899                         "(" [flag-perm *(SP flag-perm)] ")" /
 
6900                     "READ-ONLY" / "READ-WRITE" / "TRYCREATE" /
 
6901                     "UIDNEXT" SP nz-number /
 
6902                     "UIDVALIDITY" SP nz-number /
 
6903                     resp-code-apnd / resp-code-copy / "UIDNOTSTICKY" /
 
6904                     "UNAVAILABLE" / "AUTHENTICATIONFAILED" /
 
6905                     "AUTHORIZATIONFAILED" / "EXPIRED" /
 
6906                     "PRIVACYREQUIRED" / "CONTACTADMIN" / "NOPERM" /
 
6907                     "INUSE" / "EXPUNGEISSUED" / "CORRUPTION" /
 
6908                     "SERVERBUG" / "CLIENTBUG" / "CANNOT" /
 
6909                     "LIMIT" / "OVERQUOTA" / "ALREADYEXISTS" /
 
6910                     "NONEXISTENT" / "NOTSAVED" / "HASCHILDREN" /
 
6913                     atom [SP 1*<any TEXT-CHAR except "]">]
 
6924                     "BEFORE" SP date / "BODY" SP astring /
 
6925                     "CC" SP astring / "DELETED" / "FLAGGED" /
 
6926                     "FROM" SP astring / "KEYWORD" SP flag-keyword /
 
6927                     "ON" SP date / "SEEN" /
 
6928                     "SINCE" SP date / "SUBJECT" SP astring /
 
6929                     "TEXT" SP astring / "TO" SP astring /
 
6930                     "UNANSWERED" / "UNDELETED" / "UNFLAGGED" /
 
6931                     "UNKEYWORD" SP flag-keyword / "UNSEEN" /
 
6932                       ; Above this line were in [IMAP2]
 
6933                     "DRAFT" / "HEADER" SP header-fld-name SP astring /
 
6934                     "LARGER" SP number64 / "NOT" SP search-key /
 
6935                     "OR" SP search-key SP search-key /
 
6936                     "SENTBEFORE" SP date / "SENTON" SP date /
 
6937                     "SENTSINCE" SP date / "SMALLER" SP number64 /
 
6938                     "UID" SP sequence-set / "UNDRAFT" / sequence-set /
 
6939                     "(" search-key *(SP search-key) ")"
 
6941   search-modifier-name = tagged-ext-label
 
6943   search-mod-params = tagged-ext-val
 
6944                     ; This non-terminal shows recommended syntax
 
6945                     ; for future extensions.
 
6947   search-program     = ["CHARSET" SP charset SP]
 
6948                       search-key *(SP search-key)
 
6949                       ; CHARSET argument to SEARCH MUST be
 
6950                       ; registered with IANA.
 
6952   search-ret-data-ext = search-modifier-name SP search-return-value
 
6953                       ; Note that not every SEARCH return option
 
6954                       ; is required to have the corresponding
 
6955                       ; ESEARCH return data.
 
6958                       "MAX" SP nz-number /
 
6959                       "ALL" SP sequence-set /
 
6962                       ; All return data items conform to
 
6963                       ; search-ret-data-ext syntax.
 
6964                       ; Note that "$" marker is not allowed
 
6965                       ; after the ALL return data item.
 
6968                       *(SP search-return-opt)] ")"
 
6970   search-return-opt  = "MIN" / "MAX" / "ALL" / "COUNT" /
 
6973                       ; conforms to generic search-ret-opt-ext
 
6976   search-ret-opt-ext = search-modifier-name [SP search-mod-params]
 
6978   search-return-value = tagged-ext-val
 
6979                       ; Data for the returned search option.
 
6980                       ; A single "nz-number"/"number"/"number64" value
 
6981                       ; can be returned as an atom (i.e., without
 
6982                       ; quoting).  A sequence-set can be returned
 
6983                       ; as an atom as well.
 
6990                     "HEADER.FIELDS" [".NOT"] SP header-list /
 
6992                       ; top-level or MESSAGE/RFC822 or
 
6993                       ; MESSAGE/GLOBAL part
 
6995   section-part    = nz-number *("." nz-number)
 
6996                       ; body part reference.
 
6997                       ; Allows for accessing nested body parts.
 
7001   section-text    = section-msgtext / "MIME"
 
7002                       ; text other than actual body part (headers,
 
7007   seq-number      = nz-number / "*"
 
7008                       ; message sequence number (COPY, FETCH, STORE
 
7009                       ; commands) or unique identifier (UID COPY,
 
7010                       ; UID FETCH, UID STORE commands).
 
7011                       ; * represents the largest number in use.  In
 
7012                       ; the case of message sequence numbers, it is
 
7013                       ; the number of messages in a non-empty mailbox.
 
7014                       ; In the case of unique identifiers, it is the
 
7015                       ; unique identifier of the last message in the
 
7016                       ; mailbox or, if the mailbox is empty, the
 
7017                       ; mailbox's current UIDNEXT value.
 
7019                       ; response to a command that uses a message
 
7020                       ; sequence number greater than the number of
 
7021                       ; messages in the selected mailbox.  This
 
7022                       ; includes "*" if the selected mailbox is empty.
 
7024   seq-range       = seq-number ":" seq-number
 
7025                       ; two seq-number values and all values between
 
7026                       ; these two regardless of order.
 
7027                       ; Example: 2:4 and 4:2 are equivalent and
 
7028                       ; indicate values 2, 3, and 4.
 
7029                       ; Example: a unique identifier sequence range of
 
7030                       ; 3291:* includes the UID of the last message in
 
7031                       ; the mailbox, even if that value is less than
 
7035                       ; set of seq-number values, regardless of order.
 
7036                       ; Servers MAY coalesce overlaps and/or execute
 
7037                       ; the sequence in any order.
 
7038                       ; Example: a message sequence number set of
 
7039                       ; 2,4:7,9,12:* for a mailbox with 15 messages is
 
7040                       ; equivalent to 2,4,5,6,7,9,12,13,14,15
 
7041                       ; Example: a message sequence number set of
 
7042                       ; *:4,5:7 for a mailbox with 10 messages is
 
7043                       ; equivalent to 10,9,8,7,6,5,4,5,6,7 and MAY
 
7044                       ; be reordered and overlap coalesced to be
 
7047   sequence-set    =/ seq-last-command
 
7048                       ; Allow for "result of the last command"
 
7051   seq-last-command   = "$"
 
7054                     "(" status-att *(SP status-att) ")"
 
7057                     "UNSEEN" / "DELETED" / "SIZE"
 
7060                     ("UIDNEXT" SP nz-number) /
 
7061                     ("UIDVALIDITY" SP nz-number) /
 
7062                     ("UNSEEN" SP number) /
 
7063                     ("DELETED" SP number) /
 
7064                     ("SIZE" SP number64)
 
7065                       ; Extensions to the STATUS responses
 
7066                       ; should extend this production.
 
7067                       ; Extensions should use the generic
 
7068                       ; syntax defined by tagged-ext.
 
7073                       ; This ABNF production complies with
 
7074                       ; <option-extension> syntax.
 
7078   store-att-flags = (["+" / "-"] "FLAGS" [".SILENT"]) SP
 
7079                     (flag-list / (flag *(SP flag)))
 
7085   tag             = 1*<any ASTRING-CHAR except "+">
 
7088                     ; <tag> represented as <astring>
 
7091                         ; Is a valid RFC 3501 "atom".
 
7093   tagged-label-fchar  = ALPHA / "-" / "_" / "."
 
7095   tagged-label-char   = tagged-label-fchar / DIGIT / ":"
 
7098                         tagged-ext-comp *(SP tagged-ext-comp) /
 
7099                         "(" tagged-ext-comp ")"
 
7100                         ; Extensions that follow this general
 
7101                         ; syntax should use nstring instead of
 
7102                         ; astring when appropriate in the context
 
7104                         ; Note that a message set or a "number"
 
7105                         ; can always be represented as an "atom".
 
7106                         ; A URL should be represented as
 
7107                         ; a "quoted" string.
 
7109   tagged-ext-simple   = sequence-set / number / number64
 
7112                         "(" [tagged-ext-comp] ")"
 
7114   text            = 1*(TEXT-CHAR / UTF8-2 / UTF8-3 / UTF8-4)
 
7115                       ; Non-ASCII text can only be returned
 
7116                       ; after ENABLE IMAP4rev2 command
 
7118   TEXT-CHAR       = <any CHAR except CR and LF>
 
7121                       ; Hours minutes seconds
 
7124                     (copy / move / fetch / search / store /
 
7126                       ; Unique identifiers used instead of message
 
7130                       ; Unique identifiers used instead of message
 
7135   uid-range       = (uniqueid ":" uniqueid)
 
7136                       ; two uniqueid values and all values
 
7137                       ; between these two regardless of order.
 
7138                       ; Example: 2:4 and 4:2 are equivalent.
 
7140   uniqueid        = nz-number
 
7141                       ; Strictly ascending
 
7147   UTF8-CHAR       = <Defined in Section 4 of RFC 3629>
 
7149   UTF8-2          = <Defined in Section 4 of RFC 3629>
 
7151   UTF8-3          = <Defined in Section 4 of RFC 3629>
 
7153   UTF8-4          = <Defined in Section 4 of RFC 3629>
 
7155   vendor-token    = "vendor." name-component
 
7156                       ; Definition copied from RFC 2244.
 
7157                       ; MUST be registered with IANA
 
7160                       ; Signed four-digit value of hhmm representing
 
7161                       ; hours and minutes east of Greenwich (that is,
 
7162                       ; the amount that the given time differs from
 
7163                       ; Universal Time).  Subtracting the timezone
 
7164                       ; from the given time will give the UT form.
 
7165                       ; The Universal Time zone is "+0000".
 
7169   This document is a revision or rewrite of earlier documents and
 
7170   supercedes the protocol specification in those documents: [RFC3501],
 
7171   [RFC2060], [RFC1730], unpublished IMAP2bis.TXT document, [IMAP2], and
 
717411.  Security Considerations
 
7176   IMAP4rev2 protocol transactions, including electronic mail data, are
 
7177   sent in the clear over the network, exposing them to possible
 
7178   eavesdropping and manipulation unless protection is negotiated.  This
 
7179   can be accomplished by use of the Implicit TLS port, the STARTTLS
 
7180   command, negotiated confidentiality protection in the AUTHENTICATE
 
7181   command, or some other protection mechanism.
 
718311.1.  TLS-Related Security Considerations
 
7185   This section applies to use of both the STARTTLS command and the
 
7188   IMAP client and server implementations MUST comply with relevant TLS
 
7189   recommendations from [RFC8314].  If recommendations/requirements in
 
7190   this document conflict with recommendations from [RFC8314], for
 
7191   example in regards to TLS ciphersuites, recommendations from this
 
7192   document take precedence.
 
7194   Clients and servers MUST implement TLS 1.2 [TLS-1.2] or newer.  Use
 
7195   of TLS 1.3 [TLS-1.3] is RECOMMENDED.  TLS 1.2 may be used only in
 
7196   cases where the other party has not yet implemented TLS 1.3.
 
7197   Additionally, when using TLS 1.2, IMAP implementations MUST implement
 
7198   the TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 cipher suite.  This is
 
7199   important as it ensures that any two compliant implementations can be
 
7200   configured to interoperate.  Other TLS cipher suites recommended in
 
7201   RFC 7525 [RFC7525] are RECOMMENDED:
 
7202   TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256,
 
7203   TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384, and
 
7204   TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384.  All other cipher suites are
 
7205   OPTIONAL.  Note that this is a change from Section 2.1 of [IMAP-TLS].
 
7207   The list of mandatory-to-implement TLS 1.3 cipher suites is described
 
7208   in Section 9.1 of [TLS-1.3].
 
7210   During the TLS negotiation [TLS-1.3] [TLS-1.2], the client MUST check
 
7211   its understanding of the server hostname against the server's
 
7212   identity as presented in the server Certificate message, in order to
 
7213   prevent on-path attackers attempting to masquerade as the server.
 
7214   This procedure is described in [RFC7817].
 
7216   Both the client and server MUST check the result of the STARTTLS
 
7217   command and subsequent TLS [TLS-1.3] [TLS-1.2] negotiation to see
 
7218   whether acceptable authentication and/or privacy was achieved.
 
722011.2.  STARTTLS Command versus Use of Implicit TLS Port
 
7222   For maximum backward compatibility, the client MUST implement both
 
7223   TLS negotiation on an Implicit TLS port and TLS negotiation using the
 
7224   STARTTLS command on a cleartext port.
 
7226   The server MUST implement TLS negotiation on an Implicit TLS port.
 
7227   The server SHOULD also implement IMAP on a cleartext port.  If the
 
7228   server listens on a cleartext port, it MUST allow the STARTTLS
 
7231   Some site/firewall maintainers insist on TLS site-wide and prefer not
 
7232   to rely on a configuration option in each higher-level protocol.  For
 
7233   this reason, IMAP4rev2 clients SHOULD try both ports 993 and 143 (and
 
7234   both IPv4 and IPv6) concurrently by default, unless overridden by
 
7235   either user configuration or DNS SRV records [RFC6186].  A good
 
7236   algorithm for implementing such concurrent connect is described in
 
723911.3.  Client Handling of Unsolicited Responses Not Suitable for the
 
7240       Current Connection State
 
7242   Cleartext mail transmission (whether caused by firewall configuration
 
7243   errors that result in TLS stripping or weak security policies in
 
7244   email clients that choose not to negotiate TLS in the first place)
 
7245   can enable injection of responses that can confuse or even cause
 
7246   crashes in email clients.  The following measures are recommended to
 
7247   minimize damage from them.
 
7249   *  See Section 7.1.4 for special security considerations related to
 
7250      the PREAUTH response.
 
7252   *  Many server responses and response codes are only meaningful in
 
7253      authenticated or even selected state.  However, nothing prevents a
 
7254      server (or an on-path attacker) from sending such invalid
 
7255      responses in cleartext before STARTTLS/AUTHENTICATE commands are
 
7256      issued.  Before authentication, clients SHOULD ignore any
 
7257      responses other than CAPABILITY and server status responses
 
7258      (Section 7.1), as well as any response codes other than
 
7259      CAPABILITY.  (In particular, some email clients are known to
 
7260      incorrectly process LIST responses received before authentication,
 
7261      or FETCH responses when no mailbox is selected.)  Clients SHOULD
 
7262      ignore the ALERT response code until after TLS (whether using
 
7263      STARTTLS or TLS negotiation on an Implicit TLS port) or a SASL
 
7264      security layer with confidentiality protection has been
 
7265      successfully negotiated.  Unless explicitly allowed by an IMAP
 
7266      extension, when not in selected state, clients MUST ignore
 
7267      responses / response codes related to message and mailbox status
 
7268      such as FLAGS, EXIST, EXPUNGE, and FETCH.
 
727011.4.  COPYUID and APPENDUID Response Codes
 
7272   The COPYUID and APPENDUID response codes return information about the
 
7273   mailbox, which may be considered sensitive if the mailbox has
 
7274   permissions set that permit the client to COPY or APPEND to the
 
7275   mailbox, but not SELECT or EXAMINE it.
 
7277   Consequently, these response codes SHOULD NOT be issued if the client
 
7278   does not have access to SELECT or EXAMINE the mailbox.
 
728011.5.  LIST Command and Other Users' Namespace
 
7282   In response to a LIST command containing an argument of the Other
 
7283   Users' Namespace prefix, a server MUST NOT list users that have not
 
7284   granted list access to their personal mailboxes to the currently
 
7285   authenticated user.  Providing such a list could compromise security
 
7286   by potentially disclosing confidential information of who is located
 
7287   on the server or providing a starting point for a list of user
 
7292   The BODYSTRUCTURE FETCH data item can contain the MD5 digest of the
 
7293   message body in the "body MD5" field (body-fld-md5 ABNF production).
 
7294   While MD5 is no longer considered a secure cryptographic hash
 
7295   [RFC6151], this field is used solely to expose the value of the
 
7296   Content-MD5 header field (if present in the original message), which
 
7297   is just a message integrity check and is not used for cryptographic
 
7298   purposes.  Also note that other mechanisms that provide message
 
7299   integrity checks were defined since RFC 1864 [MD5] was published and
 
7300   are now more commonly used than Content-MD5.  Two such mechanisms are
 
7301   the DKIM-Signature header field [RFC6376] and S/MIME signing
 
7302   [RFC8550] [RFC8551].
 
730411.7.  Other Security Considerations
 
7306   A server error message for an AUTHENTICATE command that fails due to
 
7307   invalid credentials SHOULD NOT detail why the credentials are
 
7310   Use of the LOGIN command sends passwords in the clear.  This can be
 
7311   avoided by using the AUTHENTICATE command with a [SASL] mechanism
 
7312   that does not use plaintext passwords, by first negotiating
 
7313   encryption via STARTTLS or some other protection mechanism.
 
7315   A server implementation MUST implement a configuration that, at the
 
7316   time of authentication, requires:
 
7318   1.  The STARTTLS command has been negotiated or TLS negotiated on an
 
7321   2.  Some other mechanism that protects the session from password
 
7322       snooping has been provided
 
7324   3.  The following measures are in place:
 
7325       a)  The LOGINDISABLED capability is advertised, and [SASL]
 
7326           mechanisms (such as PLAIN) using plaintext passwords are NOT
 
7327           advertised in the CAPABILITY list.
 
7329       b)  The LOGIN command returns an error even if the password is
 
7332       c)  The AUTHENTICATE command returns an error with all [SASL]
 
7333           mechanisms that use plaintext passwords, even if the password
 
7336   A server error message for a failing LOGIN command SHOULD NOT specify
 
7337   that the user name, as opposed to the password, is invalid.
 
7339   A server SHOULD have mechanisms in place to limit or delay failed
 
7340   AUTHENTICATE/LOGIN attempts.
 
7342   A server SHOULD report any authentication failure and analyze such
 
7343   authentication failure attempts with regard to a password brute-force
 
7344   attack as well as a password spraying attack [NCSC].  Accounts with
 
7345   passwords that match well-known passwords from spraying attacks MUST
 
7346   be blocked, and users associated with such accounts must be requested
 
7347   to change their passwords.  Only a password with significant strength
 
7350   Additional security considerations are discussed in the sections that
 
7351   define the AUTHENTICATE and LOGIN commands (see Sections 6.2.2 and
 
7352   6.2.3, respectively).
 
735412.  IANA Considerations
 
7356   IANA has updated the "Service Names and Transport Protocol Port
 
7357   Numbers" registry as follows:
 
7359   1.  Registration for TCP port 143 and the corresponding "imap"
 
7360       service name have been updated to point to this document and
 
7363   2.  Registration for TCP port 993 and the corresponding "imaps"
 
7364       service name have been updated to point to this document,
 
7365       [RFC8314], and [RFC3501].
 
7367   3.  UDP ports 143 and 993 have both been marked as "Reserved" in the
 
7370   Additional IANA actions are specified in the subsections that follow.
 
737212.1.  Updates to IMAP Capabilities Registry
 
7374   IMAP4 capabilities are registered by publishing a Standards Track or
 
7375   IESG-approved Informational or Experimental RFC.  The registry is
 
7376   currently located at: <https://www.iana.org/assignments/
 
7379   As this specification revises the AUTH= prefix, STARTTLS, and
 
7380   LOGINDISABLED extensions, IANA has updated registry entries for these
 
7381   3 extensions to point to this document and [RFC3501].
 
738312.2.  GSSAPI/SASL Service Name
 
7385   GSSAPI/Kerberos/SASL service names are registered by publishing a
 
7386   Standards Track or IESG-approved Experimental RFC.  The registry is
 
7387   currently located at: <https://www.iana.org/assignments/gssapi-
 
7390   IANA has updated the "imap" service name previously registered in
 
7391   [RFC3501] to point to both this document and [RFC3501].
 
739312.3.  LIST Selection Options, LIST Return Options, and LIST Extended
 
7396   [RFC5258] specifies IANA registration procedures for LIST selection
 
7397   options, LIST return options, and LIST extended data items.  This
 
7398   document doesn't change these registration procedures.  In
 
7399   particular, LIST selection options (Section 6.3.9.1) and LIST return
 
7400   options (Section 6.3.9.2) are registered using the procedure
 
7401   specified in Section 9 of [RFC5258] (and using the registration
 
7402   template from Section 9.3 of [RFC5258]).  LIST extended data items
 
7403   are registered using the registration template from Section 9.6 of
 
7406   IANA has added a reference to RFC 9051 for the "OLDNAME" LIST-
 
7407   EXTENDED extended data item entry.  This is in addition to the
 
7408   existing reference to [RFC5465].
 
741012.4.  IMAP Mailbox Name Attributes and IMAP Response Codes
 
7412   IANA has updated the "IMAP Mailbox Name Attributes" registry to point
 
7413   to this document in addition to [RFC3501].
 
7415   IANA has updated the "IMAP Response Codes" registry to point to this
 
7416   document in addition to [RFC3501].
 
742013.1.  Normative References
 
7422   [ABNF]     Crocker, D., Ed. and P. Overell, "Augmented BNF for Syntax
 
7423              Specifications: ABNF", STD 68, RFC 5234,
 
7424              DOI 10.17487/RFC5234, January 2008,
 
7425              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc5234>.
 
7427   [BCP178]   Saint-Andre, P., Crocker, D., and M. Nottingham,
 
7428              "Deprecating the "X-" Prefix and Similar Constructs in
 
7429              Application Protocols", BCP 178, RFC 6648, June 2012.
 
7431              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/bcp178>
 
7433   [CHARSET]  Freed, N. and J. Postel, "IANA Charset Registration
 
7434              Procedures", BCP 19, RFC 2978, DOI 10.17487/RFC2978,
 
7435              October 2000, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2978>.
 
7438              Troost, R., Dorner, S., and K. Moore, Ed., "Communicating
 
7439              Presentation Information in Internet Messages: The
 
7440              Content-Disposition Header Field", RFC 2183,
 
7441              DOI 10.17487/RFC2183, August 1997,
 
7442              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2183>.
 
7445              Yang, A., Steele, S., and N. Freed, "Internationalized
 
7446              Email Headers", RFC 6532, DOI 10.17487/RFC6532, February
 
7447              2012, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc6532>.
 
7449   [IMAP-IMPLEMENTATION]
 
7450              Leiba, B., "IMAP4 Implementation Recommendations",
 
7451              RFC 2683, DOI 10.17487/RFC2683, September 1999,
 
7452              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2683>.
 
7455              Gahrns, M., "IMAP4 Multi-Accessed Mailbox Practice",
 
7456              RFC 2180, DOI 10.17487/RFC2180, July 1997,
 
7457              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2180>.
 
7460              Alvestrand, H., "Content Language Headers", RFC 3282,
 
7461              DOI 10.17487/RFC3282, May 2002,
 
7462              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc3282>.
 
7464   [LOCATION] Palme, J., Hopmann, A., and N. Shelness, "MIME
 
7465              Encapsulation of Aggregate Documents, such as HTML
 
7466              (MHTML)", RFC 2557, DOI 10.17487/RFC2557, March 1999,
 
7467              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2557>.
 
7469   [MD5]      Myers, J. and M. Rose, "The Content-MD5 Header Field",
 
7470              RFC 1864, DOI 10.17487/RFC1864, October 1995,
 
7471              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc1864>.
 
7474              Moore, K., "MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions)
 
7475              Part Three: Message Header Extensions for Non-ASCII Text",
 
7476              RFC 2047, DOI 10.17487/RFC2047, November 1996,
 
7477              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2047>.
 
7479   [MIME-IMB] Freed, N. and N. Borenstein, "Multipurpose Internet Mail
 
7480              Extensions (MIME) Part One: Format of Internet Message
 
7481              Bodies", RFC 2045, DOI 10.17487/RFC2045, November 1996,
 
7482              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2045>.
 
7484   [MIME-IMT] Freed, N. and N. Borenstein, "Multipurpose Internet Mail
 
7485              Extensions (MIME) Part Two: Media Types", RFC 2046,
 
7486              DOI 10.17487/RFC2046, November 1996,
 
7487              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2046>.
 
7490              Crispin, M., "Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) -
 
7491              MULTIAPPEND Extension", RFC 3502, DOI 10.17487/RFC3502,
 
7492              March 2003, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc3502>.
 
7495              Klensin, J. and M. Padlipsky, "Unicode Format for Network
 
7496              Interchange", RFC 5198, DOI 10.17487/RFC5198, March 2008,
 
7497              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc5198>.
 
7499   [PLAIN]    Zeilenga, K., Ed., "The PLAIN Simple Authentication and
 
7500              Security Layer (SASL) Mechanism", RFC 4616,
 
7501              DOI 10.17487/RFC4616, August 2006,
 
7502              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc4616>.
 
7504   [RFC2077]  Nelson, S., Parks, C., and , "The Model Primary Content
 
7505              Type for Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions", RFC 2077,
 
7506              DOI 10.17487/RFC2077, January 1997,
 
7507              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2077>.
 
7509   [RFC2119]  Bradner, S., "Key words for use in RFCs to Indicate
 
7510              Requirement Levels", BCP 14, RFC 2119,
 
7511              DOI 10.17487/RFC2119, March 1997,
 
7512              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2119>.
 
7514   [RFC2231]  Freed, N. and K. Moore, "MIME Parameter Value and Encoded
 
7515              Word Extensions: Character Sets, Languages, and
 
7516              Continuations", RFC 2231, DOI 10.17487/RFC2231, November
 
7517              1997, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2231>.
 
7519   [RFC3503]  Melnikov, A., "Message Disposition Notification (MDN)
 
7520              profile for Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP)",
 
7521              RFC 3503, DOI 10.17487/RFC3503, March 2003,
 
7522              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc3503>.
 
7524   [RFC4648]  Josefsson, S., "The Base16, Base32, and Base64 Data
 
7525              Encodings", RFC 4648, DOI 10.17487/RFC4648, October 2006,
 
7526              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc4648>.
 
7528   [RFC4752]  Melnikov, A., Ed., "The Kerberos V5 ("GSSAPI") Simple
 
7529              Authentication and Security Layer (SASL) Mechanism",
 
7530              RFC 4752, DOI 10.17487/RFC4752, November 2006,
 
7531              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc4752>.
 
7533   [RFC5258]  Leiba, B. and A. Melnikov, "Internet Message Access
 
7534              Protocol version 4 - LIST Command Extensions", RFC 5258,
 
7535              DOI 10.17487/RFC5258, June 2008,
 
7536              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc5258>.
 
7538   [RFC5322]  Resnick, P., Ed., "Internet Message Format", RFC 5322,
 
7539              DOI 10.17487/RFC5322, October 2008,
 
7540              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc5322>.
 
7542   [RFC5788]  Melnikov, A. and D. Cridland, "IMAP4 Keyword Registry",
 
7543              RFC 5788, DOI 10.17487/RFC5788, March 2010,
 
7544              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc5788>.
 
7546   [RFC7525]  Sheffer, Y., Holz, R., and P. Saint-Andre,
 
7547              "Recommendations for Secure Use of Transport Layer
 
7548              Security (TLS) and Datagram Transport Layer Security
 
7549              (DTLS)", BCP 195, RFC 7525, DOI 10.17487/RFC7525, May
 
7550              2015, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc7525>.
 
7552   [RFC7817]  Melnikov, A., "Updated Transport Layer Security (TLS)
 
7553              Server Identity Check Procedure for Email-Related
 
7554              Protocols", RFC 7817, DOI 10.17487/RFC7817, March 2016,
 
7555              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc7817>.
 
7557   [RFC8081]  Lilley, C., "The "font" Top-Level Media Type", RFC 8081,
 
7558              DOI 10.17487/RFC8081, February 2017,
 
7559              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc8081>.
 
7561   [RFC8098]  Hansen, T., Ed. and A. Melnikov, Ed., "Message Disposition
 
7562              Notification", STD 85, RFC 8098, DOI 10.17487/RFC8098,
 
7563              February 2017, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc8098>.
 
7565   [RFC8174]  Leiba, B., "Ambiguity of Uppercase vs Lowercase in RFC
 
7566              2119 Key Words", BCP 14, RFC 8174, DOI 10.17487/RFC8174,
 
7567              May 2017, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc8174>.
 
7569   [RFC8314]  Moore, K. and C. Newman, "Cleartext Considered Obsolete:
 
7570              Use of Transport Layer Security (TLS) for Email Submission
 
7571              and Access", RFC 8314, DOI 10.17487/RFC8314, January 2018,
 
7572              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc8314>.
 
7574   [SASL]     Melnikov, A., Ed. and K. Zeilenga, Ed., "Simple
 
7575              Authentication and Security Layer (SASL)", RFC 4422,
 
7576              DOI 10.17487/RFC4422, June 2006,
 
7577              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc4422>.
 
7580              Hansen, T., "SCRAM-SHA-256 and SCRAM-SHA-256-PLUS Simple
 
7581              Authentication and Security Layer (SASL) Mechanisms",
 
7582              RFC 7677, DOI 10.17487/RFC7677, November 2015,
 
7583              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc7677>.
 
7585   [TLS-1.2]  Dierks, T. and E. Rescorla, "The Transport Layer Security
 
7586              (TLS) Protocol Version 1.2", RFC 5246,
 
7587              DOI 10.17487/RFC5246, August 2008,
 
7588              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc5246>.
 
7590   [TLS-1.3]  Rescorla, E., "The Transport Layer Security (TLS) Protocol
 
7591              Version 1.3", RFC 8446, DOI 10.17487/RFC8446, August 2018,
 
7592              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc8446>.
 
7594   [UTF-7]    Goldsmith, D. and M. Davis, "UTF-7 A Mail-Safe
 
7595              Transformation Format of Unicode", RFC 2152,
 
7596              DOI 10.17487/RFC2152, May 1997,
 
7597              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2152>.
 
7599   [UTF-8]    Yergeau, F., "UTF-8, a transformation format of ISO
 
7600              10646", STD 63, RFC 3629, DOI 10.17487/RFC3629, November
 
7601              2003, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc3629>.
 
760313.2.  Informative References
 
760513.2.1.  Related Protocols
 
7608              Zeilenga, K., "Anonymous Simple Authentication and
 
7609              Security Layer (SASL) Mechanism", RFC 4505,
 
7610              DOI 10.17487/RFC4505, June 2006,
 
7611              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc4505>.
 
7614              Carnegie Mellon University, "STARTTLS plaintext command
 
7615              injection vulnerability", Software Engineering Institute,
 
7616              CERT Coordination Center, Vulnerability Note VU#555316,
 
7617              September 2011, <https://www.kb.cert.org/vuls/id/555316>.
 
7620              IANA, "Character Set Registrations",
 
7621              <https://www.iana.org/assignments/charset-reg/>.
 
7624              Melnikov, A., Ed., "Synchronization Operations for
 
7625              Disconnected IMAP4 Clients", RFC 4549,
 
7626              DOI 10.17487/RFC4549, June 2006,
 
7627              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc4549>.
 
7630              Newman, C., Gulbrandsen, A., and A. Melnikov, "Internet
 
7631              Message Access Protocol Internationalization", RFC 5255,
 
7632              DOI 10.17487/RFC5255, June 2008,
 
7633              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc5255>.
 
7636              IANA, "IMAP and JMAP Keywords",
 
7637              <https://www.iana.org/assignments/imap-jmap-keywords/>.
 
7639   [IMAP-MAILBOX-NAME-ATTRS-REG]
 
7640              IANA, "IMAP Mailbox Name Attributes",
 
7641              <https://www.iana.org/assignments/imap-mailbox-name-
 
7645              Crispin, M., "Distributed Electronic Mail Models in
 
7646              IMAP4", RFC 1733, DOI 10.17487/RFC1733, December 1994,
 
7647              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc1733>.
 
7649   [IMAP-URL] Melnikov, A., Ed. and C. Newman, "IMAP URL Scheme",
 
7650              RFC 5092, DOI 10.17487/RFC5092, November 2007,
 
7651              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc5092>.
 
7654              Resnick, P., Ed., Newman, C., Ed., and S. Shen, Ed., "IMAP
 
7655              Support for UTF-8", RFC 6855, DOI 10.17487/RFC6855, March
 
7656              2013, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc6855>.
 
7658   [NCSC]     NCSC, "Spray you, spray me: defending against password
 
7659              spraying attacks", May 2018, <https://www.ncsc.gov.uk/
 
7660              blog-post/spray-you-spray-me-defending-against-password-
 
7663   [RFC2087]  Myers, J., "IMAP4 QUOTA extension", RFC 2087,
 
7664              DOI 10.17487/RFC2087, January 1997,
 
7665              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2087>.
 
7667   [RFC2177]  Leiba, B., "IMAP4 IDLE command", RFC 2177,
 
7668              DOI 10.17487/RFC2177, June 1997,
 
7669              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2177>.
 
7671   [RFC2193]  Gahrns, M., "IMAP4 Mailbox Referrals", RFC 2193,
 
7672              DOI 10.17487/RFC2193, September 1997,
 
7673              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2193>.
 
7675   [RFC2342]  Gahrns, M. and C. Newman, "IMAP4 Namespace", RFC 2342,
 
7676              DOI 10.17487/RFC2342, May 1998,
 
7677              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2342>.
 
7679   [RFC3348]  Gahrns, M. and R. Cheng, "The Internet Message Action
 
7680              Protocol (IMAP4) Child Mailbox Extension", RFC 3348,
 
7681              DOI 10.17487/RFC3348, July 2002,
 
7682              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc3348>.
 
7684   [RFC3516]  Nerenberg, L., "IMAP4 Binary Content Extension", RFC 3516,
 
7685              DOI 10.17487/RFC3516, April 2003,
 
7686              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc3516>.
 
7688   [RFC3691]  Melnikov, A., "Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP)
 
7689              UNSELECT command", RFC 3691, DOI 10.17487/RFC3691,
 
7690              February 2004, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc3691>.
 
7692   [RFC4314]  Melnikov, A., "IMAP4 Access Control List (ACL) Extension",
 
7693              RFC 4314, DOI 10.17487/RFC4314, December 2005,
 
7694              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc4314>.
 
7696   [RFC4315]  Crispin, M., "Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) -
 
7697              UIDPLUS extension", RFC 4315, DOI 10.17487/RFC4315,
 
7698              December 2005, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc4315>.
 
7700   [RFC4466]  Melnikov, A. and C. Daboo, "Collected Extensions to IMAP4
 
7701              ABNF", RFC 4466, DOI 10.17487/RFC4466, April 2006,
 
7702              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc4466>.
 
7704   [RFC4731]  Melnikov, A. and D. Cridland, "IMAP4 Extension to SEARCH
 
7705              Command for Controlling What Kind of Information Is
 
7706              Returned", RFC 4731, DOI 10.17487/RFC4731, November 2006,
 
7707              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc4731>.
 
7709   [RFC4959]  Siemborski, R. and A. Gulbrandsen, "IMAP Extension for
 
7710              Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL) Initial
 
7711              Client Response", RFC 4959, DOI 10.17487/RFC4959,
 
7712              September 2007, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc4959>.
 
7714   [RFC5161]  Gulbrandsen, A., Ed. and A. Melnikov, Ed., "The IMAP
 
7715              ENABLE Extension", RFC 5161, DOI 10.17487/RFC5161, March
 
7716              2008, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc5161>.
 
7718   [RFC5182]  Melnikov, A., "IMAP Extension for Referencing the Last
 
7719              SEARCH Result", RFC 5182, DOI 10.17487/RFC5182, March
 
7720              2008, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc5182>.
 
7722   [RFC5256]  Crispin, M. and K. Murchison, "Internet Message Access
 
7723              Protocol - SORT and THREAD Extensions", RFC 5256,
 
7724              DOI 10.17487/RFC5256, June 2008,
 
7725              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc5256>.
 
7727   [RFC5465]  Gulbrandsen, A., King, C., and A. Melnikov, "The IMAP
 
7728              NOTIFY Extension", RFC 5465, DOI 10.17487/RFC5465,
 
7729              February 2009, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc5465>.
 
7731   [RFC5530]  Gulbrandsen, A., "IMAP Response Codes", RFC 5530,
 
7732              DOI 10.17487/RFC5530, May 2009,
 
7733              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc5530>.
 
7735   [RFC5819]  Melnikov, A. and T. Sirainen, "IMAP4 Extension for
 
7736              Returning STATUS Information in Extended LIST", RFC 5819,
 
7737              DOI 10.17487/RFC5819, March 2010,
 
7738              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc5819>.
 
7740   [RFC6151]  Turner, S. and L. Chen, "Updated Security Considerations
 
7741              for the MD5 Message-Digest and the HMAC-MD5 Algorithms",
 
7742              RFC 6151, DOI 10.17487/RFC6151, March 2011,
 
7743              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc6151>.
 
7745   [RFC6154]  Leiba, B. and J. Nicolson, "IMAP LIST Extension for
 
7746              Special-Use Mailboxes", RFC 6154, DOI 10.17487/RFC6154,
 
7747              March 2011, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc6154>.
 
7749   [RFC6186]  Daboo, C., "Use of SRV Records for Locating Email
 
7750              Submission/Access Services", RFC 6186,
 
7751              DOI 10.17487/RFC6186, March 2011,
 
7752              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc6186>.
 
7754   [RFC6376]  Crocker, D., Ed., Hansen, T., Ed., and M. Kucherawy, Ed.,
 
7755              "DomainKeys Identified Mail (DKIM) Signatures", STD 76,
 
7756              RFC 6376, DOI 10.17487/RFC6376, September 2011,
 
7757              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc6376>.
 
7759   [RFC6409]  Gellens, R. and J. Klensin, "Message Submission for Mail",
 
7760              STD 72, RFC 6409, DOI 10.17487/RFC6409, November 2011,
 
7761              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc6409>.
 
7763   [RFC6851]  Gulbrandsen, A. and N. Freed, Ed., "Internet Message
 
7764              Access Protocol (IMAP) - MOVE Extension", RFC 6851,
 
7765              DOI 10.17487/RFC6851, January 2013,
 
7766              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc6851>.
 
7768   [RFC7162]  Melnikov, A. and D. Cridland, "IMAP Extensions: Quick Flag
 
7769              Changes Resynchronization (CONDSTORE) and Quick Mailbox
 
7770              Resynchronization (QRESYNC)", RFC 7162,
 
7771              DOI 10.17487/RFC7162, May 2014,
 
7772              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc7162>.
 
7774   [RFC7888]  Melnikov, A., Ed., "IMAP4 Non-synchronizing Literals",
 
7775              RFC 7888, DOI 10.17487/RFC7888, May 2016,
 
7776              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc7888>.
 
7778   [RFC8126]  Cotton, M., Leiba, B., and T. Narten, "Guidelines for
 
7779              Writing an IANA Considerations Section in RFCs", BCP 26,
 
7780              RFC 8126, DOI 10.17487/RFC8126, June 2017,
 
7781              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc8126>.
 
7783   [RFC8305]  Schinazi, D. and T. Pauly, "Happy Eyeballs Version 2:
 
7784              Better Connectivity Using Concurrency", RFC 8305,
 
7785              DOI 10.17487/RFC8305, December 2017,
 
7786              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc8305>.
 
7788   [RFC8438]  Bosch, S., "IMAP Extension for STATUS=SIZE", RFC 8438,
 
7789              DOI 10.17487/RFC8438, August 2018,
 
7790              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc8438>.
 
7792   [RFC8474]  Gondwana, B., Ed., "IMAP Extension for Object
 
7793              Identifiers", RFC 8474, DOI 10.17487/RFC8474, September
 
7794              2018, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc8474>.
 
7796   [RFC8550]  Schaad, J., Ramsdell, B., and S. Turner, "Secure/
 
7797              Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (S/MIME) Version 4.0
 
7798              Certificate Handling", RFC 8550, DOI 10.17487/RFC8550,
 
7799              April 2019, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc8550>.
 
7801   [RFC8551]  Schaad, J., Ramsdell, B., and S. Turner, "Secure/
 
7802              Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (S/MIME) Version 4.0
 
7803              Message Specification", RFC 8551, DOI 10.17487/RFC8551,
 
7804              April 2019, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc8551>.
 
7806   [SMTP]     Klensin, J., "Simple Mail Transfer Protocol", RFC 5321,
 
7807              DOI 10.17487/RFC5321, October 2008,
 
7808              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc5321>.
 
781013.2.2.  Historical Aspects of IMAP and Related Protocols
 
7813              Crispin, M., "IMAP4 Compatibility with IMAP2bis",
 
7814              RFC 2061, DOI 10.17487/RFC2061, December 1996,
 
7815              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2061>.
 
7818              Crispin, M., "IMAP4 Compatibility with IMAP2 and
 
7819              IMAP2bis", RFC 1732, DOI 10.17487/RFC1732, December 1994,
 
7820              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc1732>.
 
7823              Crispin, M., "Internet Message Access Protocol - Obsolete
 
7824              Syntax", RFC 2062, DOI 10.17487/RFC2062, December 1996,
 
7825              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2062>.
 
7827   [IMAP-TLS] Newman, C., "Using TLS with IMAP, POP3 and ACAP",
 
7828              RFC 2595, DOI 10.17487/RFC2595, June 1999,
 
7829              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2595>.
 
7831   [IMAP2]    Crispin, M., "Interactive Mail Access Protocol: Version
 
7832              2", RFC 1176, DOI 10.17487/RFC1176, August 1990,
 
7833              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc1176>.
 
7835   [IMAP2BIS] Crispin, M., "INTERACTIVE MAIL ACCESS PROTOCOL - VERSION
 
7836              2bis", Work in Progress, Internet-Draft, draft-ietf-imap-
 
7837              imap2bis-02, 29 October 1993,
 
7838              <https://datatracker.ietf.org/doc/html/draft-ietf-imap-
 
7841   [RFC1064]  Crispin, M., "Interactive Mail Access Protocol: Version
 
7842              2", RFC 1064, DOI 10.17487/RFC1064, July 1988,
 
7843              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc1064>.
 
7845   [RFC1730]  Crispin, M., "Internet Message Access Protocol - Version
 
7846              4", RFC 1730, DOI 10.17487/RFC1730, December 1994,
 
7847              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc1730>.
 
7849   [RFC2060]  Crispin, M., "Internet Message Access Protocol - Version
 
7850              4rev1", RFC 2060, DOI 10.17487/RFC2060, December 1996,
 
7851              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc2060>.
 
7853   [RFC3501]  Crispin, M., "INTERNET MESSAGE ACCESS PROTOCOL - VERSION
 
7854              4rev1", RFC 3501, DOI 10.17487/RFC3501, March 2003,
 
7855              <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc3501>.
 
7857   [RFC822]   Crocker, D., "STANDARD FOR THE FORMAT OF ARPA INTERNET
 
7858              TEXT MESSAGES", STD 11, RFC 822, DOI 10.17487/RFC0822,
 
7859              August 1982, <https://www.rfc-editor.org/info/rfc822>.
 
7861Appendix A.  Backward Compatibility with IMAP4rev1
 
7863   An implementation that wants to remain compatible with IMAP4rev1 can
 
7864   advertise both IMAP4rev1 and IMAP4rev2 in its CAPABILITY response /
 
7865   response code.  (Such server implementation is likely to also want to
 
7866   advertise other IMAP4rev1 extensions that were folded into IMAP4rev2;
 
7867   see Appendix E.)  While some IMAP4rev1 responses were removed in
 
7868   IMAP4rev2, their presence will not break IMAP4rev2-only clients.
 
7870   If both IMAP4rev1 and IMAP4rev2 are advertised, an IMAP client that
 
7871   wants to use IMAP4rev2 MUST issue an "ENABLE IMAP4rev2" command.
 
7873   When compared to IMAP4rev1, some request data items, corresponding
 
7874   response data items, and responses were removed in IMAP4rev2.  See
 
7875   Appendix E for more details.  With the exception of obsolete SEARCH
 
7876   and RECENT responses, servers advertising both IMAP4rev1 and
 
7877   IMAP4rev2 would never return such removed response data items/
 
7878   responses unless explicitly requested by an IMAPrev1 client.
 
7880   Servers advertising both IMAP4rev1 and IMAP4rev2 MUST NOT generate
 
7881   UTF-8-quoted strings unless the client has issued "ENABLE IMAP4rev2".
 
7882   Consider implementation of mechanisms described or referenced in
 
7883   [IMAP-UTF-8] to achieve this goal.
 
7886   intending to be compatible with IMAP4rev1 servers, MUST be compatible
 
7887   with the Mailbox International Naming Convention described in
 
7890   Also see Appendix D for special considerations for servers that
 
7891   support 63-bit body part / message sizes and want to advertise
 
7892   support for both IMAP4rev1 and IMAP4rev2.
 
7894A.1.  Mailbox International Naming Convention for Compatibility with
 
7897   Support for the Mailbox International Naming Convention described in
 
7898   this section is not required for IMAP4rev2-only clients and servers.
 
7899   It is only used for backward compatibility with IMAP4rev1
 
7902   By convention, international mailbox names in IMAP4rev1 are specified
 
7903   using a modified version of the UTF-7 encoding described in [UTF-7].
 
7904   Modified UTF-7 may also be usable in servers that implement an
 
7905   earlier version of this protocol.
 
7907   In modified UTF-7, printable US-ASCII characters, except for "&",
 
7908   represent themselves; that is, characters with octet values 0x20-0x25
 
7909   and 0x27-0x7e.  The character "&" (0x26) is represented by the
 
7910   2-octet sequence "&-".
 
7912   All other characters (octet values 0x00-0x1f and 0x7f-0xff) are
 
7913   represented in modified base64, with a further modification from
 
7914   [UTF-7] that "," is used instead of "/".  Modified base64 MUST NOT be
 
7915   used to represent any printing of a US-ASCII character that can
 
7916   represent itself.  Only characters inside the modified base64
 
7917   alphabet are permitted in modified base64 text.
 
7919   "&" is used to shift to modified base64 and "-" to shift back to US-
 
7920   ASCII.  There is no implicit shift from base64 to US-ASCII, and null
 
7921   shifts ("-&" while in base64; note that "&-" while in US-ASCII means
 
7922   "&") are not permitted.  However, all names start in US-ASCII and
 
7923   MUST end in US-ASCII; that is, a name that ends with a non-ASCII
 
7924   ISO-10646 character MUST end with a "-".
 
7926   The purpose of these modifications is to correct the following
 
7927   problems with UTF-7:
 
7929   1.  UTF-7 uses the "+" character for shifting; this conflicts with
 
7930       the common use of "+" in mailbox names, in particular USENET
 
7933   2.  UTF-7's encoding is base64, which uses the "/" character; this
 
7934       conflicts with the use of "/" as a popular hierarchy delimiter.
 
7936   3.  UTF-7 prohibits the unencoded usage of "\"; this conflicts with
 
7937       the use of "\" as a popular hierarchy delimiter.
 
7939   4.  UTF-7 prohibits the unencoded usage of "~"; this conflicts with
 
7940       the use of "~" in some servers as a home directory indicator.
 
7942   5.  UTF-7 permits multiple alternate forms to represent the same
 
7943       string; in particular, printable US-ASCII characters can be
 
7944       represented in encoded form.
 
7946   Although modified UTF-7 is a convention, it establishes certain
 
7947   requirements on the server handling of any mailbox name with an
 
7948   embedded "&" character.  In particular, server implementations MUST
 
7949   preserve the exact form of the modified base64 portion of a modified
 
7950   UTF-7 name and treat that text as case sensitive, even if names are
 
7951   otherwise case insensitive or case folded.
 
7954   embedded "&" character, used as an argument to CREATE, is: in the
 
7955   correctly modified UTF-7 syntax; has no superfluous shifts; and has
 
7956   no encoding in modified base64 of any printing US-ASCII character
 
7957   that can represent itself.  However, client implementations MUST NOT
 
7958   depend upon the server doing this and SHOULD NOT attempt to create a
 
7959   mailbox name with an embedded "&" character unless it complies with
 
7960   the modified UTF-7 syntax.
 
7962   Server implementations that export a mail store that does not follow
 
7963   the modified UTF-7 convention MUST convert any mailbox name that
 
7964   contains either non-ASCII characters or the "&" character to modified
 
7968      and Japanese text: ~peter/mail/&U,BTFw-/&ZeVnLIqe-
 
7970      For example, the string "&Jjo!" is not a valid mailbox name
 
7971      because it does not contain a shift to US-ASCII before the "!".
 
7972      The correct form is "&Jjo-!".  The string "&U,BTFw-&ZeVnLIqe-" is
 
7973      not permitted because it contains a superfluous shift.  The
 
7974      correct form is "&U,BTF2XlZyyKng-".
 
7976Appendix B.  Backward Compatibility with BINARY Extension
 
7978   IMAP4rev2 incorporates a subset of functionality provided by the
 
7979   BINARY extension [RFC3516]; in particular, it includes additional
 
7980   FETCH items (BINARY, BINARY.PEEK, and BINARY.SIZE) but not extensions
 
7981   to the APPEND command.  IMAP4rev2 implementations that support full
 
7982   [RFC3516] functionality need to also advertise the BINARY capability
 
7983   in the CAPABILITY response / response code.
 
7985Appendix C.  Backward Compatibility with LIST-EXTENDED Extension
 
7987   IMAP4rev2 incorporates most of the functionality provided by the
 
7988   LIST-EXTENDED extension [RFC5258].  In particular, the syntax for
 
7989   multiple mailbox patterns is not supported in IMAP4rev2, unless LIST-
 
7990   EXTENDED capability is also advertised in the CAPABILITY response /
 
7993Appendix D.  63-Bit Body Part and Message Sizes
 
7995   IMAP4rev2 increases allowed body part and message sizes that servers
 
7996   can support from 32 to 63 bits.  Server implementations don't have to
 
7997   support 63-bit-long body parts/message sizes; however, client
 
7998   implementations have to expect them.
 
8000   As IMAP4rev1 didn't support 63-bit-long body part / message sizes,
 
8001   there is an interoperability issue exposed by 63-bit-capable servers/
 
8002   mailboxes that are accessible by both IMAP4rev1 and IMAP4rev2 email
 
8003   clients.  As IMAP4rev1 would be unable to retrieve the full content
 
8004   of messages bigger than 4 Gb, such servers either need to replace
 
8005   messages bigger that 4 Gb with messages under 4 Gb or hide them from
 
8006   IMAP4rev1 clients.  This document doesn't prescribe any
 
8007   implementation strategy to address this issue.
 
8009Appendix E.  Changes from RFC 3501 / IMAP4rev1
 
8011   Below is the summary of changes since RFC 3501:
 
8013   1.   Support for 64-bit message and body part sizes.
 
8015   2.   Folded in IMAP NAMESPACE [RFC2342], UNSELECT [RFC3691], UIDPLUS
 
8016        [RFC4315], ESEARCH [RFC4731], SEARCHRES [RFC5182], ENABLE
 
8017        [RFC5161], IDLE [RFC2177], SASL-IR [RFC4959], LIST-EXTENDED
 
8018        [RFC5258], LIST-STATUS [RFC5819], MOVE [RFC6851], and LITERAL-
 
8019        extensions [RFC7888].  Also folded in IMAP ABNF extensions
 
8020        [RFC4466], response codes [RFC5530], the FETCH side of the
 
8021        BINARY extension [RFC3516], and the list of new mailbox
 
8022        attributes from SPECIAL-USE [RFC6154].
 
8026   4.   SEARCH command now requires to return the ESEARCH response
 
8027        (SEARCH response is now deprecated).
 
8029   5.   Clarified which SEARCH keys have to use substring match and
 
8032   6.   Clarified that the server should decode parameter value
 
8033        continuations as described in [RFC2231].  This requirement was
 
8034        hidden in [RFC2231] itself.
 
8036   7.   Clarified that the COPYUID response code is returned for both
 
8039   8.   Tightened requirements about COPY/MOVE commands not creating a
 
8040        target mailbox.  Also required them to return the TRYCREATE
 
8041        response code, if the target mailbox doesn't exist and can be
 
8044   9.   Added the CLOSED response code from [RFC7162].  SELECT/EXAMINE
 
8045        when a mailbox is already selected now requires a CLOSED
 
8046        response code to be returned.
 
8048   10.  SELECT/EXAMINE are now required to return an untagged LIST
 
8053   12.  RECENT response on SELECT/EXAMINE, \Recent flag, RECENT STATUS,
 
8054        and SEARCH NEW items are now deprecated.
 
8056   13.  Clarified that the server doesn't need to send a new
 
8057        PERMANENTFLAGS response code when a new keyword was successfully
 
8058        added and the server advertised \* earlier for the same mailbox.
 
8060   14.  For future extensibility, extended ABNF for tagged-ext-simple to
 
8061        allow for bare number64.
 
8063   15.  Added SHOULD level requirement on IMAP servers to support
 
8064        $MDNSent, $Forwarded, $Junk, $NonJunk, and $Phishing keywords.
 
8066   16.  Mailbox names and message headers now allow for UTF-8.  Support
 
8067        for modified UTF-7 in mailbox names is not required, unless
 
8068        compatibility with IMAP4rev1 is desired.
 
8070   17.  Removed the CHECK command.  Clients should use NOOP instead.
 
8072   18.  RFC822, RFC822.HEADER, and RFC822.TEXT FETCH data items were
 
8073        deprecated.  Clients should use the corresponding BODY[]
 
8076   19.  LSUB command was deprecated.  Clients should use LIST
 
8077        (SUBSCRIBED) instead.
 
8079   20.  IDLE command can now return updates not related to the currently
 
8080        selected mailbox state.
 
8082   21.  All unsolicited FETCH updates are required to include UID.
 
8084   22.  Clarified that client implementations MUST ignore response codes
 
8085        that they do not recognize.  (Changed from a SHOULD to a MUST.)
 
8087   23.  resp-text ABNF non-terminal was updated to allow for empty text.
 
8089   24.  After ENABLE, IMAP4rev2 human-readable response text can include
 
8090        non-ASCII encoded in UTF-8.
 
8092   25.  Updated to use modern TLS-related recommendations as per
 
8093        [RFC7525], [RFC7817], and [RFC8314].
 
8095   26.  Added warnings about use of ALERT response codes and PREAUTH
 
8098   27.  Replaced DIGEST-MD5 SASL mechanism with SCRAM-SHA-256.  DIGEST-
 
8101   28.  Clarified that any command received from the client resets
 
8102        server autologout timer.
 
8104   29.  Revised IANA registration procedure for IMAP extensions and
 
8105        removed "X" convention in accordance with [BCP178].
 
8107   30.  Loosened requirements on servers when closing connections to be
 
8108        more aligned with existing practices.
 
8110Appendix F.  Other Recommended IMAP Extensions
 
8112   Support for the following extensions is recommended for all IMAP
 
8113   clients and servers.  While they significantly reduce bandwidth and/
 
8114   or number of round trips used by IMAP in certain situations, the
 
8115   EXTRA WG decided that requiring them as a part of IMAP4rev2 would
 
8116   push the bar to implement too high for new implementations.  Also
 
8117   note that the absence of any IMAP extension from this list doesn't
 
8118   make it somehow deficient or not recommended for use with IMAP4rev2.
 
8120   1.  Quick Mailbox Resynchronization (QRESYNC) and CONDSTORE
 
8121       extensions [RFC7162].  They make discovering changes to IMAP
 
8122       mailboxes more efficient, at the expense of storing a bit more
 
8125   2.  OBJECTID extension [RFC8474] helps with preserving the IMAP
 
8126       client cache when messages are moved/copied or mailboxes are
 
8131   Earlier draft versions of this document were edited by Mark Crispin.
 
8132   Sadly, he is no longer available to help with this work.  Editors of
 
8133   this revision are hoping that Mark would have approved.
 
8135   Chris Newman has contributed text on I18N and use of UTF-8 in
 
8136   messages and mailbox names.
 
8138   Thank you to Tony Hansen for helping with the index generation.
 
8139   Thank you to Murray Kucherawy, Timo Sirainen, Bron Gondwana, Stephan
 
8140   Bosch, Robert Sparks, Arnt Gulbrandsen, Benjamin Kaduk, Daniel
 
8141   Migaul, Roman Danyliw, and Éric Vyncke for extensive feedback.
 
8143   This document incorporates text from [RFC2342] (by Mike Gahrns and
 
8144   Chris Newman), [RFC3516] (by Lyndon Nerenberg), [RFC4315] (by Mark
 
8145   Crispin), [RFC4466] (by Cyrus Daboo), [RFC4731] (by Dave Cridland),
 
8146   [RFC4959] (by Rob Siemborski and Arnt Gulbrandsen), [RFC5161] (by
 
8147   Arnt Gulbrandsen), [RFC5465] (by Arnt Gulbrandsen and Curtis King),
 
8148   [RFC5530] (by Arnt Gulbrandsen), [RFC5819] (by Timo Sirainen),
 
8149   [RFC6154] (by Jamie Nicolson), [RFC6851] (by Arnt Gulbrandsen and Ned
 
8150   Freed), and [RFC8438] (by Stephan Bosch), so work done by authors/
 
8151   editors of these documents is appreciated.  Note that editors of this
 
8152   document were redacted from the above list.
 
8154   The CHILDREN return option was originally proposed by Mike Gahrns and
 
8155   Raymond Cheng in [RFC3348].  Most of the information in
 
8156   Section 6.3.9.5 is taken directly from their original specification
 
8159   Thank you to Damian Poddebniak, Fabian Ising, Hanno Boeck, and
 
8160   Sebastian Schinzel for pointing out that the ENABLE command should be
 
8161   a member of "command-auth" and not "command-any" ABNF production, as
 
8162   well as pointing out security issues associated with ALERT, PREAUTH,
 
8163   and other responses received before authentication.
 
8167   $ + - \ A B C D E F H I K L M N O P R S T U
 
8171         $Forwarded (predefined flag)
 
8173         $Junk (predefined flag)
 
8175         $MDNSent (predefined flag)
 
8177         $NotJunk (predefined flag)
 
8179         $Phishing (predefined flag)
 
8180            Section 2.3.2, Paragraph 6.10.1
 
8186         +FLAGS.SILENT <flag list>
 
8193         -FLAGS.SILENT <flag list>
 
8198         \All (mailbox name attribute)
 
8200         \Answered (system flag)
 
8202         \Archive (mailbox name attribute)
 
8204         \Deleted (system flag)
 
8206         \Draft (system flag)
 
8208         \Drafts (mailbox name attribute)
 
8210         \Flagged (mailbox name attribute)
 
8212         \Flagged (system flag)
 
8214         \HasChildren (mailbox name attribute)
 
8216         \HasNoChildren (mailbox name attribute)
 
8218         \Junk (mailbox name attribute)
 
8220         \Marked (mailbox name attribute)
 
8222         \Noinferiors (mailbox name attribute)
 
8224         \NonExistent (mailbox name attribute)
 
8225            Section 7.3.1, Paragraph 4.2.1
 
8226         \Noselect (mailbox name attribute)
 
8228         \Recent (system flag)
 
8230         \Remote (mailbox name attribute)
 
8234         \Sent (mailbox name attribute)
 
8236         \Subscribed (mailbox name attribute)
 
8238         \Trash (mailbox name attribute)
 
8240         \Unmarked (mailbox name attribute)
 
8245         ALERT (response code)
 
8251         ALL (search result option)
 
8252            Section 6.4.4, Paragraph 6.6.1
 
8253         ALL (search return item name)
 
8254            Section 7.3.4, Paragraph 7.6.1
 
8255         ALREADYEXISTS (response code)
 
8256            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.4.1
 
8257         ANSWERED (search key)
 
8261         APPENDUID (response code)
 
8262            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.6.1
 
8263         AUTHENTICATE (command)
 
8265         AUTHENTICATIONFAILED (response code)
 
8266            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.8.1
 
8267         AUTHORIZATIONFAILED (response code)
 
8268            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.10.1
 
8274         BADCHARSET (response code)
 
8276         BCC <string> (search key)
 
8278         BEFORE <date> (search key)
 
8280         BINARY.PEEK[<section-binary>]<<partial>> (fetch item)
 
8282         BINARY.SIZE[<section-binary>] (fetch item)
 
8283            Section 6.4.5, Paragraph 9.6.1
 
8284         BINARY.SIZE[<section-binary>] (fetch result)
 
8285            Section 7.5.2, Paragraph 4.4.1
 
8286         BINARY[<section-binary>]<<number>> (fetch result)
 
8287            Section 7.5.2, Paragraph 4.2.1
 
8288         BINARY[<section-binary>]<<partial>> (fetch item)
 
8289            Section 6.4.5, Paragraph 9.2.1
 
8294         BODY <string> (search key)
 
8296         BODY.PEEK[<section>]<<partial>> (fetch item)
 
8298         BODYSTRUCTURE (fetch item)
 
8300         BODYSTRUCTURE (fetch result)
 
8301            Section 7.5.2, Paragraph 4.10.1
 
8302         BODY[<section>]<<origin octet>> (fetch result)
 
8303            Section 7.5.2, Paragraph 4.8.1
 
8304         BODY[<section>]<<partial>> (fetch item)
 
8305            Section 6.4.5, Paragraph 9.10.1
 
8308         Body Structure (message attribute)
 
8313         CANNOT (response code)
 
8314            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.14.1
 
8315         CAPABILITY (command)
 
8317         CAPABILITY (response code)
 
8319         CAPABILITY (response)
 
8321         CC <string> (search key)
 
8323         CLIENTBUG (response code)
 
8324            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.18.1
 
8327         CLOSED (response code)
 
8328            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.20.1
 
8329         CONTACTADMIN (response code)
 
8330            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.22.1
 
8333         COPYUID (response code)
 
8334            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.24.1
 
8335         CORRUPTION (response code)
 
8336            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.26.1
 
8337         COUNT (search result option)
 
8339         COUNT (search return item name)
 
8348         DELETED (search key)
 
8350         DELETED (status item)
 
8359         ENVELOPE (fetch item)
 
8361         ENVELOPE (fetch result)
 
8362            Section 7.5.2, Paragraph 4.42.1
 
8367         EXPIRED (response code)
 
8368            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.28.1
 
8373         EXPUNGEISSUED (response code)
 
8374            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.30.1
 
8375         Envelope Structure (message attribute)
 
8386         FLAGGED (search key)
 
8390         FLAGS (fetch result)
 
8394         FLAGS <flag list> (store command data item)
 
8396         FLAGS.SILENT <flag list> (store command data item)
 
8398         FROM <string> (search key)
 
8402         Flags (message attribute)
 
8407         HASCHILDREN (response code)
 
8408            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.32.1
 
8409         HEADER (part specifier)
 
8410            Section 6.4.5.1, Paragraph 5
 
8411         HEADER <field-name> <string> (search key)
 
8413         HEADER.FIELDS (part specifier)
 
8414            Section 6.4.5.1, Paragraph 5
 
8415         HEADER.FIELDS.NOT (part specifier)
 
8416            Section 6.4.5.1, Paragraph 5
 
8422         INTERNALDATE ( fetch item)
 
8424         INTERNALDATE (fetch result)
 
8426         INUSE (response code)
 
8427            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.34.1
 
8428         Internal Date (message attribute)
 
8433         KEYWORD <flag> (search key)
 
8435         Keyword (type of flag)
 
8436            Section 2.3.2, Paragraph 4
 
8440         LARGER <n> (search key)
 
8442         LIMIT (response code)
 
8443            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.36.1
 
8453         MAX (search result option)
 
8454            Section 6.4.4, Paragraph 6.4.1
 
8455         MAX (search return item name)
 
8456            Section 7.3.4, Paragraph 7.4.1
 
8457         MAY (specification requirement term)
 
8459         MESSAGES (status item)
 
8461         MIME (part specifier)
 
8462            Section 6.4.5.1, Paragraph 7
 
8463         MIN (search result option)
 
8464            Section 6.4.4, Paragraph 6.2.1
 
8465         MIN (search return item name)
 
8466            Section 7.3.4, Paragraph 7.2.1
 
8469         MUST (specification requirement term)
 
8471         MUST NOT (specification requirement term)
 
8473         Message Sequence Number (message attribute)
 
8480         NAMESPACE (response)
 
8484         NONEXISTENT (response code)
 
8485            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.38.1
 
8488         NOPERM (response code)
 
8489            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.40.1
 
8490         NOT <search-key> (search key)
 
8492         NOT RECOMMENDED (specification requirement term)
 
8499         ON <date> (search key)
 
8501         OPTIONAL (specification requirement term)
 
8502            Section 1.2; Section 1.2
 
8503         OR <search-key1> <search-key2> (search key)
 
8505         OVERQUOTA (response code)
 
8506            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.42.1
 
8510         PARSE (response code)
 
8512         PERMANENTFLAGS (response code)
 
8513            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.46.1
 
8516         PRIVACYREQUIRED (response code)
 
8517            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.48.1
 
8518         Permanent Flag (class of flag)
 
8519            Section 2.3.2, Paragraph 9
 
8521            Section 2.3.2, Paragraph 5
 
8525         READ-ONLY (response code)
 
8527         READ-WRITE (response code)
 
8529         RECOMMENDED (specification requirement term)
 
8533         REQUIRED (specification requirement term)
 
8535         RFC822.SIZE (fetch item)
 
8537         RFC822.SIZE (fetch result)
 
8539         RFC822.SIZE (message attribute)
 
8544         SAVE (search result option)
 
8545            Section 6.4.4, Paragraph 6.10.1
 
8552         SENTBEFORE <date> (search key)
 
8554         SENTON <date> (search key)
 
8556         SENTSINCE <date> (search key)
 
8558         SERVERBUG (response code)
 
8559            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.54.1
 
8560         SHOULD (specification requirement term)
 
8562         SHOULD NOT (specification requirement term)
 
8564         SINCE <date> (search key)
 
8568         SMALLER <n> (search key)
 
8578         SUBJECT <string> (search key)
 
8582         Session Flag (class of flag)
 
8583            Section 2.3.2, Paragraph 9
 
8584         System Flag (type of flag)
 
8585            Section 2.3.2, Paragraph 2
 
8589         TEXT (part specifier)
 
8590            Section 6.4.5.1, Paragraph 5
 
8591         TEXT <string> (search key)
 
8593         TO <string> (search key)
 
8595         TRYCREATE (response code)
 
8606         UID <sequence set> (search key)
 
8608         UIDNEXT (response code)
 
8610         UIDNEXT (status item)
 
8612         UIDNOTSTICKY (response code)
 
8613            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.60.1
 
8614         UIDVALIDITY (response code)
 
8616         UIDVALIDITY (status item)
 
8618         UNANSWERED (search key)
 
8620         UNAVAILABLE (response code)
 
8621            Section 7.1, Paragraph 4.64.1
 
8622         UNDELETED (search key)
 
8624         UNDRAFT (search key)
 
8626         UNFLAGGED (search key)
 
8628         UNKEYWORD <flag> (search key)
 
8630         UNKNOWN-CTE (response code)
 
8634         UNSEEN (status item)
 
8638         UNSUBSCRIBE (command)
 
8640         Unique Identifier (UID) (message attribute)
 
8645   Alexey Melnikov (editor)
 
8652   Email: Alexey.Melnikov@isode.com
 
8655   Barry Leiba (editor)
 
8656   Futurewei Technologies
 
8658   Email: barryleiba@computer.org
 
8659   URI:   http://internetmessagingtechnology.org/